JP6762508B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

Some pachinko gaming machines are provided with various winning openings such as a starting opening (ball entry opening), a large winning opening (special winning opening), and a normal winning opening, as described in Patent Document 1 below. The starting port includes a fixed starting port in which the ease of entering the ball does not change and a variable starting port in which the ease of entering the ball can be changed. The variable start port facilitates the entry of a game ball based on the operation of an ordinary electric accessory (so-called electric chew). The big prize opening is opened based on the operation of the special electric accessory.

If the flowing game ball enters each winning opening, the player can win the prize ball. The number of prize balls that the player obtains when one game ball enters is predetermined for each winning opening. On the other hand, if the flowing game ball enters an out opening different from each winning opening, the player cannot win the winning ball.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-208555

By the way, in pachinko gaming machines, whether or not the base is within the normal range, whether or not the output rate exceeds a predetermined value, and the like are inspected in advance. The base (specific ratio value) is the ratio of the total number of prize balls acquired by the player to the number of shot balls, which is the number of game balls fired by the player. The payout rate (specific ratio value) is the number of prize balls (feature operation prize balls) obtained based on the operation of the accessory (ordinary electric accessory, special electric accessory, etc.) among the total number of prize balls acquired by the player. It is the ratio of number). If the base or the payout rate is out of the normal range, the pachinko machine becomes a pachinko machine that can give an excessive profit or disadvantage to the player. Therefore, by inspecting the base and the output rate in advance, an appropriate pachinko machine can be installed in the hall.

However, in recent years, some pachinko machines installed in the hall have been tampered with, or due to malfunctions or breakdowns, the specific percentage values such as the base and output rate have become abnormal. there were. In other words, there were pachinko machines whose specific ratio values such as base and output rate were significantly different from the values at the time of inspection. Therefore, as the above-mentioned countermeasure, a pachinko gaming machine capable of confirming a specific ratio value is required.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the problem is to provide a game machine capable of confirming a specific ratio value.

The present invention takes the following measures to solve the above problems .

The present invention
In a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined control condition , and can be controlled to a normal gaming state or a privileged gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state .
A means for measuring the total number of prize balls acquired by the player, and a means for measuring the total number of prize balls won by the player.
A means for measuring the number of launched balls, which can measure the number of launched balls launched by a player and has flowed down the game area.
The number of normal total prize balls measured by the total prize ball number measuring means in the normal game state and the number of normal fire balls measured by the launch ball number measuring means in the normal game state, regardless of the game state. A storage means that can store at least the total number of fired balls measured by the launch ball number measuring means ,
A display means capable of displaying a normal base , which is a ratio of the total number of normal prize balls to the number of normal launch balls , in a predetermined display area,
Power-on means that can turn on power and
A main control board that has a game CPU that controls the progress of the game and can store the processing information of the game CPU.
A RAM clearing operation means capable of erasing the stored processing information of the gaming CPU when an operation is performed with the power being turned on by the power-on means is provided.
The storage means retains the stored contents of the normal total prize ball number, the normal launch ball number, and the total launch ball number even when the RAM clear operation means is operated with the power being turned on by the power-on means. It is possible and
The display means
The value obtained by adding the total number of launching balls measured by the launching ball number measuring means after the power is turned on to the total number of launching balls held in the storage means when the power is turned on. , While displaying a non-numerical mode different from the normal base in the display area when the normal base is less than a predetermined specific number for determining that the value has converged to some extent ,
The value obtained by adding the total number of launching balls measured by the launching ball number measuring means after the power is turned on to the total number of launching balls held in the storage means when the power is turned on. When the number is equal to or greater than the specific number, the total number of prize balls is increased after the power is turned on with respect to the normal total number of prize balls held in the storage means when the power is turned on in the display area. The launch ball after the power is turned on with respect to the value obtained by adding the total number of normal prize balls measured by the measuring means and the number of normal launch balls held in the storage means when the power is turned on. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to display a normal base which is a ratio of a value obtained by adding the number of normal launch balls measured by a number measuring means .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to confirm a specific ratio value.

It is a perspective view of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the game machine frame of the game machine is open. It is a front view of the game board provided in the game machine. It is a front view which shows in detail the 2nd prize-winning apparatus provided in the game machine. It is an enlarged front view of the game display included in the game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the main control board and the main board case provided in the game machine. It is a perspective view which shows the back side of the game machine. It is an enlarged front view of the output rate indicator provided in the game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of the game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the sub-control board side of the game machine. (A) is a prize ball counter addition table, (B) is a diagram showing each storage unit and each storage area of the game RAM, and (C) is a diagram showing each counter and each storage area of the special memory. Is. It is a figure which shows the connection state of each light emitting part for game provided in the game display. It is a figure which shows the connection state of each lighting part for output rate provided in the output rate indicator. It is a figure which shows the wiring around the game control microcomputer. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of 1st form. It is a figure which shows the dynamic lighting control in a game display. It is a figure which shows the case which clears the light emitting state of each light emitting part for game, or the lighting state of each lighting part for output rate. It is a figure which shows the case which selects the 1st light emitting region. It is a figure which shows the case where each light emitting part for game of a 1st light emitting region is made to emit light. It is a figure which shows the case which selects the 2nd light emitting region. It is a figure which shows the case where each light emitting part for game of a 2nd light emitting region is made to emit light. It is a figure which shows the case which selects the 3rd light emitting region. It is a figure which shows the case where each light emitting part for game of a 3rd light emitting region is made to emit light. It is a figure which shows the case of selecting the 4th light emitting region. It is a figure which shows the case where each light emitting part for game of a 4th light emitting region is made to emit light. It is a figure which shows the dynamic lighting control in the output rate display. It is a figure which shows the case which selects the 1st lighting area. It is a figure which shows the case where each lighting part for output rate of a 1st lighting area is turned on. It is a figure which shows the case which selects the 2nd lighting area. It is a figure which shows the case where each lighting part for output rate of a 2nd lighting area is turned on. It is a figure which shows the case which selects the 3rd lighting area. It is a figure which shows the case where each lighting part for output rate of a 3rd lighting area is turned on. It is a figure which shows the case of selecting the 4th lighting area. It is a figure which shows the case where each lighting part for output rate of a 4th lighting area is turned on. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of the 1st comparative example. It is a figure which shows the dynamic lighting control of the 2nd comparative example. It is a hit type judgment table. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a reach determination table, (C) is an ordinary symbol hit determination table, and (D) is an ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table. This is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. It is an open pattern determination table of the electric chew. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main side. It is a flowchart of an input process. It is a flowchart of the prize ball counter addition processing. It is a flowchart of the output rate calculation processing. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing (big hit game). It is a flowchart of output processing. It is a flowchart of a game display process. It is a flowchart of the output rate display processing. It is a flowchart of the output rate display processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a figure which shows the clear image displayed on the display screen. It is a figure which shows the out-port sensor of the modification of 1st form. It is a figure which shows the electrical connection state of the outlet sensor of the modification of 1st form. (A) is a diagram showing a prize ball counter addition table of the modified example of the first form, and (B) is a diagram showing each storage unit and each storage area of the game RAM of the modified example of the first form. , (C) is a diagram showing each counter and each storage area of the modified example of the first form. It is a flowchart of the input process of the modification of 1st form. It is a flowchart of the counter addition processing of the modification of 1st form. It is a flowchart of the base arithmetic processing of the modification of 1st form. It is a flowchart of output processing of the modification of 1st form. It is a flowchart of the base display processing of the modification of 1st form. It is a flowchart of the base display processing of the modification of 1st form. It is a flowchart of the base display processing of the modification of 1st form. It is a flowchart of the base display processing of the modification of 1st form. (A) is a diagram showing each storage unit, each storage area, and each counter of the gaming RAM of the second form, and (B) is a diagram showing each storage area of the special memory of the second form. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of the 2nd form. It is a flowchart of the prize ball counter addition processing of 2nd form. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing of 2nd form. (A) is a diagram showing each storage unit, each storage area, and each counter of the game RAM of the modified example of the second form, and (B) shows each storage area of the special memory of the modified example of the second form. It is a figure. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of the modification of the 2nd form. It is a figure which shows the state which the rear side case of 3rd form rotates. It is a figure which shows the state which the rear side case of the 1st modification of 3rd form rotates. It is a figure which shows the state which the rear side case of the 2nd modification of 3rd form slides. It is a figure which shows the state which the rear side case of the 3rd modification of 3rd form slides. It is a figure which shows the state which the external output rate display device of 4th form is detachable to the connector of a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of 4th form. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of 4th form. It is a flowchart of the input process of 4th form. It is a flowchart of output processing of 4th form. It is a flowchart of the input processing of the modification of 4th form. It is a figure which shows the display mode at the time of not displaying the output rate by the output rate indicator in the fifth form. It is a flowchart of output processing of 5th form. It is a flowchart of the display change processing of the 5th form. It is a flowchart of output processing of the modification of 5th form. It is a figure which shows each aspect of the main control board of 6th form and a special LED. It is a flowchart of output processing of the 6th form. It is a flowchart of the special LED processing of 6th form. It is a flowchart of output processing of the modification of 6th form. It is a flowchart of the special LED processing of the modification of 6th form. It is a figure which shows each aspect of the main control board of 7th form and a special LED. It is a simple abnormality determination table of the 7th form. It is a flowchart of the input process of the 7th form. It is a flowchart of the simple abnormality determination processing of 7th form. It is a flowchart of output processing of 7th form. It is a flowchart of the special LED processing of the 7th form. (A) is a normal simple abnormality determination table of the modified example of the seventh form, (B) is a time-saving simple abnormality determination table of the modified example of the seventh form, and (C) is a jackpot of the modified example of the seventh form. This is a simple abnormality judgment table. It is a flowchart of the input process of the modification of the 7th form. It is a flowchart of the simple abnormality determination processing of the modification of 7th form. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of 8th form. (A) is a prize ball counter addition table of the eighth form, (B) is a diagram showing a fluctuation number counter of the special memory of the eighth form and each storage area, and (C) is a payout of the eighth form. It is a figure which shows each counter of the special memory for use. It is a flowchart of the input process executed by the game control microcomputer of the 8th form. It is a flowchart of the payout side timer interrupt processing of the 8th form. It is a flowchart of the input process executed by the payout control microcomputer of the 8th form. It is a perspective view which shows the back side of the game machine in 1st modification of 8th form. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of the 1st modification of 8th form. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit provided in the payout control board of the 1st modification of 8th form. (A) is a figure which shows the prize ball counter addition table of the 2nd modification of the 8th form, and (B) shows each storage area of the special memory of the 2nd modification of the 8th form, and the fluctuation count counter. It is a figure, (C) is a figure which shows each counter of the special memory for payout of the 2nd modification of the 8th form. It is a flowchart of the input process executed by the game control microcomputer of the 2nd modification of the 8th form. It is a flowchart of the input process executed by the payout control microcomputer of the 2nd modification of the 8th form. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of 9th form. It is a flowchart of the game display processing of 9th form. It is a flowchart of the output rate display processing of the 9th form. It is a flowchart of the output rate display processing of the 9th form. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of the tenth form. It is a flowchart of the output rate display processing of the tenth form. It is a flowchart of the output rate display processing of the tenth form. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of the eleventh form. It is a flowchart of the output rate display processing of the eleventh form. It is a flowchart of the output rate display processing of the eleventh form. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of the twelfth form. It is a figure which shows the switch circuit part of the twelfth form. It is a flowchart of output processing of the twelfth form. It is a flowchart of the output rate display processing of the twelfth form. It is a flowchart of the output rate display processing of the twelfth form. It is a figure which shows the game display of the thirteenth form. It is a flowchart of the output rate display processing of the thirteenth form. It is a flowchart of the output rate display processing of the thirteenth form. It is a flowchart of output processing of 14th form. It is a flowchart of the output processing of the modification of 14th form. It is a figure which shows the game display of another modification. It is a prize ball counter addition table of another modification. It is a perspective view which shows the back side of the game machine of another modification. It is a figure which shows the state which the output rate indicator of another modification is sliding. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another modification. It is a figure which shows the game RAM of another modification. It is a figure which shows the discharge port sensor of another modification.

1. 1. Configuration of Gaming Machine A pachinko gaming machine according to each embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following description, the left-right direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine will be described so as to coincide with the left-right direction for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine. Further, the front direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine will be described as a direction approaching the player facing the pachinko gaming machine, and the rear direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine will be described as a direction away from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 (see FIG. 3) mounted in the gaming machine frame 50. As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine frame 50 constitutes an outer shell portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and includes an outer frame 51, an inner frame 52, and a front frame (glass door frame) 53. The outer frame (base frame portion) 51 is a vertically rectangular frame body that forms the outer shell of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The inner frame (holding frame portion) 52 is a vertically rectangular frame body that is arranged inside the outer frame 51 and on which the game board 2 is attached. The front frame (front door portion) 53 is arranged on the front side of the outer frame 51 and the inner frame 52, and has a vertically rectangular shape that protects the game board 2.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine frame 50 is configured to include a hinge portion 54 on the left end side. Due to the hinge portion 54, the front frame 53 is rotatable with respect to the outer frame 51 and the inner frame 52, and the inner frame 52 is rotatable with respect to the outer frame 51 and the front frame 53, respectively. It has become. An opening 53a is formed in the central portion of the front frame 53, and a transparent glass plate (window portion) 55 is attached to the opening 53a so that the player can visually recognize the game area 3 described later.

The inner frame 52 of the game machine frame 50 is provided with a frame opening detection switch (frame opening detecting means) 50a capable of detecting that the inner frame 52 is open (rotated) with respect to the outer frame 51. ing. Therefore, when the inner frame 52 is closed with respect to the outer frame 51, the frame opening detection switch 50a is in a state where the opening of the inner frame 52 is not detected (OFF state). On the other hand, when the inner frame 52 is open to the outer frame 51, the frame open detection switch 50a is in a state of detecting the opening of the inner frame 52 (ON state), and outputs a detection signal. In the following, when the detection of the opening of the game machine frame 50 will be described, it will mean the detection of the opening of the inner frame 52.

The frame opening switch (frame opening detecting means) 50a of the present embodiment is a photo switch (photo sensor). However, it may be a switch that detects physical contact with a push button and a spring, a pressure switch (pressure sensor), a proximity switch (proximity sensor), or the like, and can be appropriately changed. The frame opening detecting means is not limited to the one that detects the opening of the inner frame 52 with respect to the outer frame 51. For example, the opening of the front frame 53 to the inner frame 52 may be detected, and both the opening of the inner frame 52 to the outer frame 51 and the opening of the front frame 53 to the inner frame 52 can be detected. Is also good. Further, the arrangement location of the frame opening detecting means is not limited to the inner frame 52, but may be an outer frame 51 or a front frame 53, and can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the lower right side of the front frame 53, a handle (launching operation means) 60 for launching the game ball with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle is provided. Further, on the lower side of the front frame 53, a hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 for storing game balls (game medium) and a surplus ball saucer (lower plate) for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 61. 62 is provided. Further, around the hit ball supply plate 61, an effect button 63 and a select button (cross key) 64 that can be operated by the player at the time of the effect executed with the progress of the game are provided. The select button 64 is composed of an upward button, a downward button, a left direction button, and a right direction button.

Next, the game board 2 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 2 is formed with a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, surrounded by a rail member 4. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a decorative board lamp 5 (see FIG. 10). The game board 2 has a plate-shaped member (game board) arranged on the front side and a back unit (various control boards, an image display device 7, a harness, etc., which will be described later) arranged on the rear side. It is an integrated one.

In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails that change the direction in which the game ball flows down are projected. An image display device 7 which is a liquid crystal display device is arranged near the center of the game area 3. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variable display (variable display) of the effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, 8R synchronized with the variable display (variable display) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. There is an effect symbol display area for performing. The effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is called the effect symbol variation effect. The effect design variation effect is sometimes called "decorative pattern variation effect" or simply "variation effect".

The effect symbol display area includes, for example, three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in the middle symbol display area, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. Each of the production symbols consists of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The image display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, by combining the left, middle, and right effect symbols. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (that is, the result of the jackpot lottery) is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

For example, if a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublet such as "777". In addition, if it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. That is, the player generally does not grasp the result of the jackpot lottery by the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but by the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbol, for example, there is a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction.

The image display device 7 displays a display screen 7a, such as a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game, a demonstration effect for waiting for customers (customer waiting effect), and the like, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect using the above-mentioned effect symbols. Display on. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbols such as numbers, the effect images other than the effect symbols such as the background image and the character image are also displayed.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area for displaying the effect hold image 9A according to the number of stored first special figure hold described later and the number of stored second special figure hold described later are displayed. There is a second effect hold display area for displaying the effect hold image 9B according to the above. By displaying the effect hold images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed by the first special figure hold display 43a (see FIG. 5) described later and the second special figure hold display 43b (FIG. 5). The number of stored memories of the second special figure hold displayed in (see 5) can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

A center decorative body 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. A stage portion 11 that can guide a game ball that rolls on the upper surface to the first starting port 20, which will be described later, is formed in the lower portion of the center decorative body 10. Further, the center decorative body 10 is provided with a board movable body 15 that can move in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the initial state, the board movable body 15 is in a retracted position that is almost invisible from the front as shown in FIG. The movable board 15 can be moved from the retracted position to an exposed position (not shown) that hides most of the display screen 7a. The panel movable body 15 is driven by a panel movable body drive motor 15a (see FIG. 10).

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, the first start port (also referred to as the first entry port, the first start winning opening, or the fixed entry port) in which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. A first start winning device (also referred to as a first ball entering means or a fixed ball entering means) 19 including 20 is provided. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the first special symbol lottery (big hit lottery, that is, acquisition and determination of a big hit random number or the like).

Further, below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, a normal variable winning device (so-called electric machine) provided with a second starting port (also referred to as a second ball entry port, a second start winning port, or a variable ball entry port) 21 is provided. Chu) 22 is provided. The electric chew 22 is also referred to as a variable ball entry means, a second ball entry means, and a second start winning device. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 is an ordinary electric accessory that includes an opening / closing member (movable member) 23 and opens / closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the opening / closing member 23. The opening / closing member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (see FIG. 9). When the opening / closing member 23 is in the open state, the game ball can be entered into the second starting port 21, and when the opening / closing member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball cannot be entered into the second starting port 21. That is, the second starting port 21 is a starting port in which the ease of entering the game ball can be changed. If the electric chew makes it easier to enter the ball into the second starting port when the opening / closing member is in the open state than when it is in the closed state, the electric chew is second-started when it is in the closed state. It does not have to be impossible to enter the ball into the mouth.

Further, on the right side of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, the first large winning device (first special winning means and first special variable winning) provided with the first large winning opening (first special winning opening) 30 is provided. (Also referred to as a device) 31 is provided. The first special winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 that takes an open state and a closed state, and is a special electric accessory that opens / closes the first special winning opening 30 by operating the opening / closing member 32. Is. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 9). A game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

Further, above the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3, a second large winning device (second special winning means and second special variable winning) provided with a second large winning opening (second special winning opening) 35 is provided. (Also referred to as a device) 36 is provided. The second special winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member) 37 that takes an open state and a closed state, and is a special electric accessory that opens / closes the second special winning opening 35 by operating the opening / closing member 37. Is. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 9). A game ball can enter the second large winning opening 35 only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, a specific area (V area) 39 through which the game ball passing through the second large winning opening 35 can pass is inside the second large winning device 36. A non-specific region 70 is formed. In the second large winning device 36, a second large winning opening sensor 35a for detecting the winning of a game ball into the second large winning opening 35 is arranged upstream of the specific area 39 and the non-specific area 70. .. Further, in the specific area 39, a specific area sensor 39a for detecting the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 is arranged. Further, in the non-specific area 70, a non-specific area sensor 70a for detecting the passage of a game ball through the non-specific area 70 is arranged. The second prize-winning device 36 includes a distribution member 71 that distributes the game ball that has passed through the second prize-winning opening 35 to either the specific area 39 or the non-specific area 70, and the distribution member solenoid that drives the distribution member 71. It is equipped with 73.

FIG. 4A shows when the distribution member solenoid 73 is energized. As shown in FIG. 4A, when the distribution member solenoid 73 is energized, the distribution member 71 is in the first state (passage allowable state) that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area 39. When the distribution member 71 is in the first state, the game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35 passes through the specific area 39 after passing through the second large winning opening sensor 35a. The route of this game ball is called the first route.

FIG. 4B shows the distribution member solenoid 73 when the distribution member solenoid 73 is not energized. As shown in FIG. 4B, when the distribution member solenoid 73 is not energized, the distribution member 71 is in a second state (passage blocking state) that prevents the game ball from passing through the specific area 39. When the distribution member 71 is in the second state, the game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35 passes through the non-specific area 70 after passing through the second large winning opening sensor 35a. The route of this game ball is called the second route.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the passage of the gaming ball into the specific area 39 triggers the transition to the high probability state described later. That is, the specific area 39 is a probabilistic operation port. On the other hand, the non-specific area 70 is not a probabilistic operation port. Further, the first prize-winning device 31 is not provided with a specific area as a probability variation operation port. That is, only a non-specific area is provided.

Returning to FIG. 3, a gate (also referred to as a passing port or passing area) 28 through which the game ball can pass is provided above the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity to execute a normal symbol lottery (that is, acquisition and determination of a normal symbol random number (winning random number)) for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22. Further, a normal winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. Further, at the lowermost part of the game area 3, an out port 16 is provided to discharge a game ball that has been driven into the game area 3 but has not won any of the winning ports to the outside of the game area 3.

In the game area 3 in which various winning openings and the like are arranged, the left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and the right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side are arranged. There is. A method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called a left-handed hit. On the other hand, a method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called right-handed hitting. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the flow path through which the game ball flows down when playing left-handed is called the first flow path R1, and the flow path through which the game ball flows down when playing right-handed is called the first flow path R1. , The second flow path R2.

A first starting port 20, a normal winning port 27, and an out port 16 are provided on the first flow path R1. By driving the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting port 20 or the normal winning port 27. The gate 28 is not arranged on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the electric chew 22 is not released when hitting left.

On the other hand, on the second flow path R2, a second big prize device 36, a gate 28, a first big prize device 31, an electric chew 22, and an out port 16 are provided. By driving the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2, the player can pass through the gate 28 and win a prize in the second prize opening 35, the first prize opening 30, and the second starting opening 21. Can be aimed at.

A game display 40 is arranged on the right side of the game board 2. The game display 40 displays game information based on the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 5, the game display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41a for variable display of the first special symbol and a second special symbol display 41b for variable display of the second special symbol. ing. The first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight game light emitting units (LED elements) LA1 to LA8. The second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight game light emitting units (LED elements) LA9 to LA16.

Further, the game display 40 has a normal symbol display 42 that fluctuates the normal symbol and a first special symbol hold display that displays the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol hold). The operation hold of the second special symbol display 43b and the normal symbol display 42 (normal symbol hold) that displays the number of stored operations of the device 43a and the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol hold). It includes a general-purpose map holding indicator 44 that displays the number of stored images. The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of two game light emitting units (LED elements) LA17 and LA18. The first special figure holding display 43a is composed of two game light emitting units (LED elements) LA19 and LA20. The second special figure holding indicator 43b is composed of two game light emitting units (LED elements) LA21 and LA22. The normal drawing hold display 44 is composed of two game light emitting units (LED elements) LA23 and LA24.

Further, the game display 40 displays a right-handed display 45 that indicates that the player should hit right, a game state display 46 that displays the current game state, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game. A round indicator 47 and the like are included. The right-handed display 45 is composed of two game light emitting units (LED elements) LA25 and LA26. The game status indicator 46 is composed of three game light emitting units (LED elements) LA27 to LA29. The round display 47 is composed of three game light emitting units (LED elements) LA30 to LA32. A total of 32 game light emitting units LA1 to LA32 in the game display 40 are mounted on the game LED substrate 40a.

The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the second starting port 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display 41. In addition, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold. Further, the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold indicator 43.

In the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variably displayed (variable display) and then stopped, so that a lottery based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) can be performed. Notify the result. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a predetermined special symbol (a special symbol of a specific stop mode, that is, a jackpot symbol), an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (that is, the type of the winning jackpot) is used. A jackpot game (an example of a special game) is performed in which the big prize opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) is opened. The opening pattern of the big winning opening in the big hit game will be described later.

Specifically, the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b is a first special symbol or a second special according to the result of the jackpot lottery depending on the light emitting mode of the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16. It displays a design. For example, when a jackpot (one of a plurality of types of jackpots described later) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the game light emitting units LA1, LA2, LA5, and LA6 emit light on the first special symbol display 41a. The jackpot symbol is displayed (see FIG. 16 (A)). If the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, the second special symbol display 41b displays the lost symbol emitted only by the game light emitting unit LA15 (see FIG. 16B). As the lost symbol, a mode may be adopted in which all the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 of the first special symbol display 41a and all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 of the second special symbol display 41b are not emitted. The lost symbol is not a specific special symbol.

Further, before the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined fluctuation time, and the variation display mode is, for example, the first special symbol. In this embodiment, the light emitting units LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16 for games emit light so that the light repeatedly flows on the display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b. In the variable display mode, if the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16 are not stopped (light emission display in a specific mode), the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16 are displayed all at once. Anything is fine, such as blinking.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball is entered (winning) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various random numbers such as a jackpot random number acquired for the entry (entry). The ball information) is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 (see FIG. 9). Specifically, if the ball enters the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 85a (see FIG. 9) as the first special figure hold, and the ball enters the second start port 21. For example, it is stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b (see FIG. 9) as the second special figure holding. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four each.

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. The digestion of the special figure hold means to determine the jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold and execute the variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variation display of the special symbol. Even if a ball is entered during execution or a jackpot game, the right to a jackpot lottery for the entry can be reserved up to a predetermined number.

Then, the number of such special figure hold indicators is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 43. For example, in the first special figure hold indicator 43a or the second special figure hold indicator 43b, when the number of special figure hold (first special figure hold or second special figure hold) is "1", the game on the right side. When only the light emitting units LA19 and LA21 for light emission (lighting) are emitted and the number of special figure reservations is "2", only the light emitting units LA20 and LA22 for games on the left side are emitted and the number of special figure reservations is increased. In the case of "3", the two game light emitting units LA19, LA20, LA21, LA22 are blinked, and in the case of the number of special figure reservations of "4", the two game light emitting units LA19, LA20, Make LA21 and LA22 emit light. In this embodiment, the second special figure hold is preferentially digested over the first special figure hold. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), the second start port 21 is opened with an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. Auxiliary games are played. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, the ordinary symbol display 42 displays the ordinary symbols according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery according to the light emitting modes of the game light emitting units LA17 and LA18. For example, when the lottery result is a win, the normal hit symbols emitted by the game light emitting units LA17 and LA18 are displayed. If the lottery result is lost, only the lower game light emitting unit LA17 emits a normal lost symbol (see FIG. 16C). As a normal loss symbol, a mode in which the game light emitting units LA17 and LA18 are not emitted may be adopted. Note that the normal loss symbol is not a specific normal symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, a mode in which the game light emitting units LA17 and LA18 alternately emit light. The variation display mode may be any mode such that the game light emitting units LA17 and LA18 blink all at once unless the game light emitting units LA17 and LA18 are stopped display (lighting display in a specific mode).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (winning random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal symbol holding storage unit 86 (see FIG. 9). It is temporarily stored as a normal figure hold. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four.

The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the normal symbol random number (winning random number) corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute the variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage up to the predetermined number.

Then, the number of such a normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. For example, when the number of normal figure hold is "1", the normal figure hold indicator 44 emits (lights up) only the light emitting unit LA23 for games on the right side, and when the number of normal figure hold is "2". Only the game light emitting unit LA24 on the left side is made to emit light, and when the number of normal figure reservations is "3", the two game light emitting units LA23 and LA24 are blinked to increase the number of normal figure reservations. In the case of "4", the two game light emitting units LA23 and LA24 are made to emit light.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a jackpot game can be executed, and the gaming state can be controlled to a high probability state or a time saving state as described later. When the jackpot game is being executed (big hit game state), or in the high probability state or the time saving state, the right-handed display 45 is on the right because the right-handed player has more benefits than the left-handed player. It is designed to indicate that it is in a state to be hit. For example, the right-handed display 45 causes two game light emitting units LA25 and LA26 to emit light as a display of a state to be right-handed (see FIG. 16D). In the normal game state, the right-handed display 45 does not cause the two game light emitting units LA25 and LA26 to emit light because the privilege given to the player is more likely to be given to the player when the player hits the left side than when the player hits the right side. It has become.

Further, the game state at the present time is displayed on the game state display 46. For example, in a high probability state, the game state display 46 causes two game light emitting units LA27 and LA28 to emit light. Further, in the time saving state, the game state display 46 causes the game light emitting unit LA29 to emit light. Therefore, in the high probability state and the time saving state, the three game light emitting units LA27, LA28, and LA29 emit light, and in the normal probability state and the time saving state, only the game light emitting unit LA29 emits light. In the normal game state (normal probability state and non-time saving state), the game state display 46 does not emit light from the three light emitting units LA27, LA28, and LA29 for games (see FIG. 16D).

In addition, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is displayed on the round display 47. However, in this embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is set to 16R only (see FIG. 37). Therefore, the round display 47 causes the three game light emitting units LA30, LA31, and LA32 to emit light as a display of the number of rounds (16R) during the execution of the jackpot game (see FIG. 16D).

By the way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is characterized in that it can display the output rate. The output rate (specific ratio value) is the total number of prize balls that the player has acquired from the time the power is turned on (at the predetermined start time) to the present time, and is the amount of the prize (ordinary electric bonus, special electric bonus). It is the ratio of the number of prize balls acquired based on the operation (the number of prize balls for the accessory operation, the number of specific game balls). However, there are a bonus ratio and a continuous bonus ball ratio in the output rate, and there are a bonus prize ball number and a continuous bonus ball number in the bonus operation prize balls. The bonus ball ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of bonus balls) acquired based on the operation of all the prize balls including the ordinary electric bonus and the special electric bonus among the total number of prize balls. The continuous bonus ball ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of continuous prize balls) obtained based on the continuous operation of the special electric bonus ball to the total number of prize balls. In other words, the continuous bonus ball ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls acquired based only on the execution of the jackpot game to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is a value that is the denominator before calculating the output rate (measured value in the denominator), and the number of prize balls for operating the character (number of prize balls for the character and the number of prize balls for the continuous character) is the rate of output. It is a value (numerator measurement value) that becomes the numerator before calculating.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine is designed so that a test firing test of a gaming ball is conducted for 10 hours before it is installed in the hall. At this time, it is inspected that the accessory ratio does not exceed 70% (70%), and that the continuous accessory ratio does not exceed 60% (60%). That is, it is inspected whether or not the output rate is within the normal range. If the ratio of the characters exceeds 70% or the ratio of the continuous characters exceeds 60%, it means that the pachinko machine is capable of giving the player an excessive privilege. In this way, pachinko gaming machines that are judged to be within the normal range by inspection are installed in the hall. However, in the past, pachinko gaming machines that have been illegally modified after being inspected, have a bonus ratio of over 70% due to breakdowns or malfunctions, or have a continuous bonus ratio of over 60%. It was not possible to completely deny the possibility that it was.

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is an output rate indicator (specific indicator) capable of displaying the output rate in order to make it possible to determine whether or not an unauthorized modification has been made, or a failure or malfunction has occurred. ) 300 is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the output rate indicator (display means) 300 is integrally attached to the rear surface side of the main control board 80. As will be described in detail later, the main control board (main board) 80 is a board on which a game control microcomputer 81 capable of executing control processing related to the progress of the game is mounted. By the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81, the output rate (accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio) is displayed on the output rate display 300. As described above, the output rate display 300 is arranged on the main control board 80, and the output rate is displayed by the game control microcomputer 81 for the following reasons.

The main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) is subject to proper operation inspection in the test, unlike the sub control board 90 and the like described later. That is, it is guaranteed that the control process by the game control microcomputer 81 is appropriate. Therefore, if the output rate is displayed by the game control microcomputer 81, the output rate display is highly reliable. In short, in order to prevent the output rate display itself from being performed illegally, the output rate display 300 is arranged on the main control board 80, and the output rate is displayed by the game control microcomputer 81. .. As a result, it is possible for the person who confirms the output rate to grasp the output rate as reliable information.

As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 80 is housed inside the main board case 400. The main board case 400 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so as not to obstruct the line of sight of electronic components (integrated circuits, etc.) on the main control board 80. The main board case 400 has a structure that is divided into two by a rear side case 401 arranged on the rear side and a front side case 402 on the front side. A connector CN2 is attached above the rear surface side of the main control board 80. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the connector CN1 is attached to the game LED board 40a of the game display 40. Therefore, the connector attached to one end side of the harness (not shown) is connected to the connector CN1 of the game LED board 40a, and the connector attached to the other end side of the harness (not shown) is the connector CN2 of the main control board 80. Connected to. As a result, the game control microcomputer 81 can output a signal based on the control process to the game display 40 via the harness. As a result, the game display 40 is adapted to display game information by causing the light emitting units LA1 to LA32 for each game to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 7, the main control board 80 and the main board case 400 are arranged on the back side of the game machine frame 50. Specifically, the main board case 400 containing the main control board 80 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit (not shown) of the game board 2 inside the game machine frame 50. Therefore, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the hall and the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (the inner frame 52 is closed with respect to the outer frame 51), the main control board 80 and the output rate display 300 It is impossible to see. On the other hand, if the game machine frame 50 is opened (the inner frame 52 is opened with respect to the outer frame 51), the main control board 80 and the output rate display 300 can be visually recognized through the transparent rear side case 401. It is possible to do. In this way, in order to confirm the output rate displayed on the output rate display 300, the game machine frame 50 is opened first.

As shown in FIG. 8, the output rate display 300 is a so-called quadruple 7-segment display, and like the game display 40 (see FIG. 5), has a total of 32 lighting (light emitting) portions. .. Specifically, the output rate display 300 includes a first lighting area 310, a second lighting area 320, a third lighting area 330, and a fourth lighting area 340 in order from left to right. The four lighting areas (display areas) 310, 320, 330, and 340 each have eight lighting units (LED elements) LB1 for output so that they can represent numbers from "0" to "9". It has ~ LB8, LB9 to LB16, LB17 to LB24, and LB25 to LB32. Since the 4-unit 7-segment display is a distribution product that is widely distributed in the market, it is possible to inexpensively configure the output rate display 300 by using the 4-unit 7-segment display.

Next, the display on the output rate display 300 will be described. In the first lighting area 310, it is possible to display a tens digit when the output rate (role ratio or continuous bonus ratio) is displayed as a percentage (percentage). For example, when the output rate is 60%, in the first lighting area 310, the output rate lighting units LB1, LB3, LB4, LB5, LB6, LB7 are lit to display “6” (FIG. 26 (FIG. 26). See A)). In the second lighting area 320, the ones digit when the output rate is displayed as a percentage (percentage) can be displayed. For example, when the output rate is 60%, in the second lighting area 320, the output rate lighting units LB9, LB10, LB11, LB12, LB13, and LB14 are lit to display “0” (FIG. 26 (FIG. 26). B) See).

In the third lighting area 330, it is indicated whether the output rate displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 is the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio. In this embodiment, when the accessory ratio is displayed, "1" is displayed in the third lighting area 330. That is, if the lighting units LB18 and LB19 for the output rate are lit, the accessory ratio is displayed. On the other hand, when the continuous accessory ratio is displayed, "2" is displayed in the third lighting area 330 (see FIG. 26C). That is, if the lighting units LB17, LB18, LB20, LB21, and LB23 for the output rate are lit, the continuous accessory ratio is displayed.

In the fourth lighting area 340, it is indicated whether the output rate displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 is an effective value or a reference value. Here, the meanings of valid values or reference values will be described. As mentioned above, the output rate is the ratio of the number of prize balls acquired based on the operation of the accessory to the total number of prize balls acquired from the time when the power is turned on to the present time, but when the power is turned on. If the time played by the player is short, there is a possibility that the payout rate has not converged. Therefore, for a person who confirms the output rate, it cannot be judged correctly unless the output rate as a value that has converged to some extent is displayed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the first condition that the total number of prize balls acquired so far after the power is turned on is "10000" (predetermined number of prize balls) or more, or special until the present time after the power is turned on. If any of the second conditions that the number of fluctuations of the symbol is executed is "3000" (predetermined rotation speed) or more is satisfied, the output rate has converged to some extent (effective value). I try to consider it as. On the contrary, if neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, the output rate is regarded as a value (reference value) that has not converged to some extent.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the output rate as an effective value is displayed, "1" (specific number) is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340 (see FIG. 26 (D)). That is, if the output rate lighting units LB26 and LB27 are lit, either of the above-mentioned first condition or second condition is satisfied. Therefore, if "1" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340, it is possible to correctly determine the output rate as an effective value that has converged to some extent. On the other hand, when displaying the output rate as a reference value, "0" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340. That is, if the output rate lighting units LB25, LB26, LB27, LB28, LB29, and LB30 are lit, it means that neither the first condition nor the second condition described above is satisfied. Therefore, if "0" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340, it is possible to confirm the output rate as a reference value that may not have converged yet.

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relates to a main control board (game control board) 80 that controls game profits such as a jackpot lottery and a transition of a game state, and an effect to be executed as the game progresses. It includes a sub control board (effect control board) 90 for controlling, a payout control board 110 for controlling payout of game balls, and the like. The main control board 80 and the payout control board 110 each correspond to a main board that can affect the result of the game. The main control board 80 and the payout control board 110 form a main control unit, and the sub control board 90 constitutes a sub control unit together with the image control board 100, the sub drive board 107, and the voice control board 106, which will be described later. The sub control unit may include at least a sub control board 90 and can control a game effect using the effect means (image display device 7, speaker 67, frame lamp 66, panel lamp 5, panel movable body 15, etc.). Just do it.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a power supply board 150. A power switch 155 is connected to the power supply board 150, and the power on / off is switched by the ON / OFF operation of the power switch 155. The power source is the power of AC24V supplied from the power source plug 160 to the power supply board 150 in a state where the power source plug 160 shown in FIG. 7 is connected to the outlet of the amusement park (hall). The power supply board (power-on means) 150 includes an AC-DC converter and a DC-DC converter, and is required to operate the main control board 80, the sub control board 90, and the payout control board 110 (DC37V, DC32V, It is possible to supply electric power of DC12V, DC5V, etc., and to supply necessary electric power to other devices via these substrates.

Further, the power supply board 150 is provided with a backup power supply circuit 151. The backup power supply circuit (backup power supply means) 151 is a RAM 84, a special memory 89, and a sub of the main control board 80, which will be described later, when the power required for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not supplied due to a power failure such as business closure or a power failure. Power can be supplied to the RAM 94 of the control board 90. Therefore, the information (stored contents) stored in the RAM 84 and the special memory 89 of the main control board 80 and the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 is retained even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down. The RAM (volatile memory) 84 of the main control board 80 and the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 are volatile storage means (DRAM). The backup power supply circuit 151 includes a large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The main control board 80 may be provided with a backup power supply circuit for the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 and the special memory 89, or the sub control board 90 may be provided with a backup power supply circuit for the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90.

Further, the power supply board 150 is equipped with a RAM clear switch (RAM clear operation means) 152 for causing the CPU 82 to clear the information stored in the RAM 84 with respect to the main control board 80. As shown in FIG. 7, the main control board 80 is arranged on the back side (rear surface side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and various other control boards including the power supply board 150 are also arranged on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ing. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 152 and the power switch 155 cannot be operated unless the employee in the hall where the game machine frame 50 can be opened or the person who confirms (inspects) the output rate. That is, it can be said that the RAM clear switch 152 and the power switch 155 are operation means that cannot be operated by the player. The signal based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 is output from the power supply board 150 to the main control board 80. The location of the RAM clear switch 152 is not limited to the power supply board 150, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the main control board 80 may be used.

As shown in FIG. 9, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer (main control means) 81 includes a ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the ROM 83, and a RAM 84 that stores processing information of the CPU 82 as a work memory. It includes an I / O port unit (input / output circuit) 87 for inputting / outputting data and signals, and a special memory 89 used as a work memory for calculating the output rate.

As shown in FIG. 9, the RAM 84 is provided with a special figure reservation storage unit 85 (first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and second special figure reservation storage unit 85b) and a normal figure reservation storage unit 86. Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, the RAM 84 has a first game data storage area, a second game data storage area, and a third game data for storing data information for displaying game information on the game display 40. A storage area and a fourth game data storage area are provided. The ROM 83 may be externally attached.

The special memory (special storage means) 89 is a dedicated memory for storing processing information for calculating the output rate. As shown in FIG. 11 (C), the special memory 89 contains a counter for 100 balls, a counter for the actual total number of prize balls, a counter for the number of bonus balls, a counter for the number of continuous prize balls, and a counter for the number of fluctuations. , A bonus ratio storage area, a continuous bonus ratio storage area, and a checksum storage area are provided.

The 100-ball counter (first counter) counts the number of prize balls acquired by the player one by one, and when 100 balls are counted (when the count reaches 100 balls or more), the value is reset to "0". It is supposed to be done. The actual total prize ball number counter (second counter) counts one when 100 balls are counted by the 100 ball counter. That is, the actual total prize ball counter is a counter that increases by one each time the number of prize balls reaches 100 balls. In this way, the 100-ball counter and the actual total prize ball counter measure the total number of prize balls paid out from the time the power is turned on to the present time as one in 100-ball units (measurement for 100 balls). Means).

The prize ball number counter measures the total number of prize balls paid out based on the operation of the prize ball from the time when the power is turned on to the present time. The continuous prize ball number counter measures the total number of prize balls paid out based only on the execution of the jackpot game from the time when the power is turned on. The fluctuation count counter measures the number of fluctuations in which the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed from the time when the power is turned on to the present time. The accessory ratio storage area stores the calculated accessory ratio. The continuous accessory ratio storage area stores the calculated continuous accessory ratio. The checksum storage area stores the checksum value calculated for the storage content of the special memory 89 as described later.

In this embodiment, the output rate display 300 displays the output rate (role ratio or continuous accessory ratio) as a two-digit integer (for example, "60") as a percentage. This is because, if the output rate is displayed using a decimal point, for example, "0.60", it is necessary to display the integer "0" and the decimal point, and the number of digits to be displayed increases. In addition, the reason why three digits or more are not displayed is that it is almost unnecessary for the person who confirms the output rate to grasp the detailed value of three digits or more.

By the way, when trying to calculate the bonus ratio as a percentage value, in general, the number of prize balls is divided by the total number of prize balls, which is a value measured in units of one ball, and then multiplied by 100. There is a way to do it. However, the division process requires a program to check if it is divided by "0" or if there is a deviation in the digit position, and it is included in the four arithmetic operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, division). This is a process with a heavy load. In particular, in the case of the above method, since the value of the total number of prize balls as the denominator is larger than the value of the number of prize balls as the numerator, the adjustment of the digit position at the time of division becomes complicated in terms of software. That is, in the software division process, the subtraction process is repeated, and if the denominator value is larger than the numerator value, the process becomes complicated by adjusting the digit position.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the total number of prize balls is measured as one in units of 100 balls by using the counter for 100 balls and the counter for the actual total number of prize balls. As a result, when calculating the bonus ratio as the value of the percentage, the value of the actual total prize ball counter (the total number of prize balls is 100 balls) with respect to the value of the bonus ball counter (the number of prize balls). It is decided to divide by the value measured as one in the unit). As a result, the value of the denominator becomes smaller than the value of the numerator, and it is possible to simplify the soft processing at the time of division. Further, it is possible to omit the multiplication process of multiplying by 100.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, a 100-ball counter (first counter) that can be reset to a value of "0" when 100 balls are counted, and an actual 100-ball counter that can count one by counting 100 balls. A total prize ball counter (second counter) is used. Therefore, it is possible to perform the calculation processing of the output rate with the value of 2 bytes as it is. That is, the counter used in a normal pachinko machine can count 2-byte values (values from 0 to 65535). However, if you try to count the total number of prize balls in units of one ball using only one counter, the total number of prize balls will exceed 65535 as the game progresses, and it can be treated as a 2-byte value. It disappears. Therefore, by using two counters, a counter for 100 balls and a counter for the actual total number of prize balls, it is possible to substantially count up to 6553500 balls, which is 100 times the total number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to handle the value as it is in 2 bytes in the calculation of the output rate. In this way, it is possible to calculate the output rate in a unit (2 bytes) that is easy for the game control microcomputer 81 to handle, and it is possible to avoid complicating the calculation process.

In the above, when calculating the bonus ball ratio, the value of the bonus ball number counter is divided by the value of the actual total prize ball counter, but when calculating the continuous bonus ball ratio, Is simply divided by the value of the actual total prize ball counter to the value of the number of consecutive prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the same action and effect as the above-mentioned action and effect, and the same description will be omitted. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the calculated bonus ratio as a percentage value in the bonus ratio storage area of the special memory 89, and stores the calculated continuous bonus ratio as a percentage value in the continuous bonus ratio storage of the special memory 89. It is designed to be stored in the area.

Here, in the present embodiment, unlike the information stored in the RAM 84, the information stored in the special memory 89 is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on. That is, the information stored in the special memory 89 is basically not erased after the power is turned on for the first time for the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the output rate (combination ratio or continuous bonus ratio) calculated in this embodiment is the bonus operation among the total number of prize balls from the first power-on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the present time. It means the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls for the character, the number of prize balls for the continuous character). The reason why the special memory 89 is provided separately from the existing RAM 84 so that the stored contents of the special memory 89 are not erased is based on the following reasons.

As described above, by the time the output rate reaches a value (effective value) that has converged to some extent, the player has sufficiently played the game, and the total number of prize balls and the number of prizes for operating the character have become large. You need to be. However, even after one day has passed, it is quite possible that the number of fluctuations is less than 3000 and the total number of prize balls is less than 10,000. In this case, by operating the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on the next day, information for tentatively calculating the output rate (total number of prize balls, number of prize balls for prizes, number of consecutive prize balls, number of fluctuations, etc.) is obtained. If it is cleared, there is a risk that the output rate as an effective value cannot be calculated forever. Therefore, in this embodiment, the output rate as an effective value can be calculated by not erasing the stored contents of the special memory 89 even when the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on. In particular, since the information stored in the special memory 89 is basically not erased, the longer the game period is, for example, one month or more, the more converged the output rate is. It is possible to calculate.

The special memory 89 of the present embodiment is a volatile storage means (DRAM) that cannot retain the stored contents when the power is not supplied. However, as described above, power (backup power supply) can be supplied to the special memory 89 from the backup power supply circuit 151 of the power supply board 150 when the business is closed or a power failure occurs. Therefore, the stored contents stored in the special memory 89 are not erased if the power is cut off for about several days.

Returning to the description of the electrical configuration on the main control board 80 side shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, the drive circuit 200 is provided on the main control board 80. The drive circuit 200 is a circuit for displaying game information on the game display 40 based on a signal (data information) output from the game control microcomputer 81, and is also a circuit for displaying game information on the output rate display 300. It is a circuit for displaying. The configuration of the drive circuit 200 will be described in detail later.

Further, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88. Therefore, signals are input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and signals are output to each solenoid from the main control board 80. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first winning opening sensor 30a, a second winning opening sensor 35a, a specific area sensor 39a, and non-specific. The area sensor 70a and the normal winning opening sensor 27a are connected. Further, a frame opening detection switch 50a is connected to the main control board 80, and a detection signal from the frame opening detection switch 50a can be input to the game control microcomputer 81.

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second large winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 35. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 in the second special winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39. The non-specific area sensor 70a is provided in the non-specific area 70 in the second special winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 70. The ordinary winning opening sensor 27a is provided in each ordinary winning opening 27 and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary winning opening 27.

Further, as the solenoids, the electric chew solenoid 24, the first special winning opening solenoid 33, the second special winning opening solenoid 38, and the distribution member solenoid 73 are connected. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the opening / closing member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. The distribution member solenoid 73 drives the distribution member 71 of the second special winning device 36.

Further, on the main control board 80, the game display 40 (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b, ordinary symbol display 42, first special symbol hold display 43a, second special symbol hold display) The device 43b, the normal drawing hold display 44, the right-handed display 45, the game status display 46, and the round display 47) are connected. Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring.

On the payout control board 110, a prize ball payout device 120, a ball rental payout device 130, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and ball lending is possible based on information such as an inserted prepaid card). The launcher 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (see FIG. 1). As shown in FIG. 7, the payout control board 110 is arranged below the main control board 80 and is surrounded by a payout board case 500 made of a transparent synthetic resin.

The payout control board (main board) 110 mounts a payout control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) 116 capable of executing control processing related to payout of game balls according to a program. The payout control microcomputer (payout control means) 116 includes a ROM 118 that stores a program for controlling payout, a RAM 119 that is used as a work memory, a CPU 117 that executes a program stored in the ROM 118, and input / output of data and signals. The I / O port unit (input / output circuit) 109 for performing the above is included. The ROM 118 may be externally attached.

The payout control microcomputer 116 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls based on the signal (prize ball command) from the game control microcomputer 81. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting, and the detection signal by the prize ball sensor 122 is output to the payout control board 110. In this embodiment, the number of winning balls by winning the ordinary winning opening 27 is eight. Further, the number of prize balls for winning the first starting port 20 is 3, and the number of winning balls for winning the second starting port 21 is 7. The number of prize balls by winning the first prize opening 30 is 15 balls, and the number of prize balls by winning the second prize opening 35 is 15 balls (see FIG. 11A). The number of prize balls for winning each prize opening is not limited to the above, and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 116 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 to pay out the ball lending based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The ball lending sensor to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting, and the detection signal by the ball lending sensor 132 is output to the payout control board 110. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the launching device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the contact with the handle 60, and the firing volume 115 detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60. .. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, one gaming ball is launched in about 0.6 seconds.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

As shown in FIG. 10, a one-chip microcomputer for effect control (hereinafter referred to as “microcomputer for effect control”) 91 that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer (effect control means) 91 includes a ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a CPU 92 that executes a program stored in the ROM 93. , An I / O port unit (input / output circuit) 97 for inputting / outputting data and signals is included. The ROM 93 may be externally attached.

The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the sub drive board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 causes the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to control the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80.

The image control board 100 includes a ROM 103 that stores a program or the like for controlling an image display or the like, a RAM 104 that is used as a work memory, and a CPU 102 that executes a program stored in the ROM 103. The ROM 103 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, image data such as characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols (including effect patterns), and background images. Is stored.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is a frame lamp 66 (light emitting means provided in the game machine frame 50) or a panel via the sub drive board 107 and the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Controls the lighting of lamps such as the lamp 5. In detail, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) for determining the light emission mode of each lamp (LED element), and each is according to the light emission pattern data. Controls the light emission of the lamp (LED element). The data stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control of the panel movable body 15 via the sub drive board 107 and the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (also referred to as drive data) that determines the operation mode of the panel movable body 15, and performs drive control of the panel movable body drive motor 15a according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the operation pattern data.

Further, the effect button detection switch (SW) 63a and the select button detection switch 64a are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (see FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a detection signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90. Further, the select button detection switch 64a detects that the select button 64 (see FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the select button 64 is pressed, a detection signal is output from the select button detection switch 64a to the sub control board 90.

Note that FIGS. 9 and 10 are only functional block diagrams for explaining the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the substrates shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 are not provided. Except for the main control board 80, any of a plurality of boards shown in FIGS. 9 or 10 may be configured as one board, or one board shown in FIG. 9 or 10 may be configured as a plurality of boards. good.

3. 3. Connection state between the game display 40 and the output rate display 300 and the game control microcomputer 81 Next, FIGS. 12 to 15 show the connection state between the game display 40 and the output rate display 300 and the game control microcomputer 81. The explanation will be based on. Therefore, first, based on FIG. 12, the electrical connection state of each game light emitting unit (light emitting unit) LA1 to LA32 of the game display 40 will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, the connector CN1 provided on the game display 40 is provided with 12 pins.

The first common signal line A1, the second common signal line A2, the third common signal line A3, and the fourth common signal line A4 are connected to the first to fourth pins of the connector CN1, respectively. From the 5th pin to the 12th pin of the connector CN1, the first data signal line Aa, the second data signal line Ab, the third data signal line Ac, the fourth data signal line Ad, the fifth data signal line Ae, and the fifth data signal line Ae. The 6 data signal line Af, the 7th data signal line Ag, and the 8th data signal line Ah are connected to each other.

In the following, the region where the light emitting units LA1 to LA8 for each game of the first special symbol display 41a are provided will be referred to as a "first light emitting region 410". Further, the region in which the light emitting units LA9 to LA16 for each game of the second special symbol display 41b are provided is referred to as a "second light emitting region 420". Further, the light emitting units LA17 and LA18 for each game of the normal symbol display 42, the light emitting units LA19 to LA22 for each game of the special figure hold display 43, and the light emitting units LA23 and LA24 for each game of the normal figure hold display 44. The region provided with and is referred to as a "third light emitting region 430". Further, the right-handed display 45 is provided with the game light emitting units LA25 and LA26, the game status display 46 is provided with the game light emitting units LA27 to LA29, and the round display 47 is provided with the game light emitting units LA30 to LA32. The region is referred to as a "fourth light emitting region 440".

The first common signal line A1 is connected to the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 in the first light emitting region 410. The second common signal line A2 is connected to the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting region 420. The third common signal line A3 is connected to the game light emitting units LA17 to LA24 in the third light emitting region 430. The fourth common signal line A4 is connected to the game light emitting units LA25 to LA32 in the fourth light emitting region 440. The eight data signal lines Aa to Ah from the first data signal line Aa to the eighth data signal line Ah are the eight gaming light emitting units LA1 to LA8 of the first light emitting region 410 and the second light emitting region. The eight game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 of 420, the eight game light emitting units LA17 to LA24 of the third light emitting region 430, and the eight game light emitting units LA25 to LA32 of the fourth light emitting region 440, respectively. linked.

With the above-mentioned connection, the game control microcomputer 81 performs dynamic lighting control on the 32 game light emitting units LA1 to LA32. That is, if one signal line (a total of 32) is connected to each of the 32 gaming light emitting units LA1 to LA32 and static lighting control is performed, the number of signal lines becomes too large. The game control microcomputer 81, which is an 8-bit microcomputer, cannot control lighting. Therefore, the number of signal lines is reduced by connecting the common signal lines A1, A2, A3, and A4 to each of the light emitting regions 410, 420, 430, and 440 having eight game light emitting units. .. Then, in the present embodiment, the light emitting regions that can emit light are sequentially switched among the four light emitting regions 410, 420, 430, and 440 every 4 ms. As a result, it is possible to make the human eye appear to emit light at the same time in the four light emitting regions 410, 420, 430, and 440 by utilizing the afterimage phenomenon.

The outline of the dynamic lighting control will be described. For example, it is made to appear that all 32 game light emitting units LA1 to LA32 are emitting light. In this case, first, the voltage of the first common signal line A1 is set to the "H" level (voltage higher than the upper limit threshold voltage), and the voltages of the other common signal lines A2, A3, and A4 are set to the "L" level (lower limit). Set to a voltage lower than the threshold voltage). Then, the voltage of each data signal line Aa to Ah is set to the "H" level. As a result, a drive current flows through all the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 in the first light emitting region 410, and the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 emit light. Subsequently, after 4 ms, the voltage of the second common signal line A2 is set to the "H" level, and the voltages of the other common signal lines A1, A3, and A4 are set to the "L" level. Then, the voltage of each data signal line Aa to Ah is set to the "H" level. As a result, a drive current flows through all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting region 420, and the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 emit light.

Subsequently, after 4 ms, the voltage of the third common signal line A3 is set to the "H" level, and the voltages of the other common signal lines A1, A2, and A4 are set to the "L" level. Then, the voltage of each data signal line Aa to Ah is set to the "H" level. As a result, a drive current flows through all the game light emitting units LA17 to LA24 in the third light emitting region 430, and the game light emitting units LA17 to LA24 emit light. Subsequently, after 4 ms, the voltage of the fourth common signal line A4 is set to the "H" level, and the voltages of the other common signal lines A1, A2, and A3 are set to the "L" level. Then, the voltage of each data signal line Aa to Ah is set to the "H" level. As a result, a drive current flows through all the game light emitting units LA25 to LA32 in the fourth light emitting region 440, and the game light emitting units LA25 to LA32 emit light. After that, similarly, the light emission from the first light emission region 410 to the fourth light emission region 440 is repeated every 4 ms. In this way, at a certain moment, the game light emitting unit emits light only in any one of the four light emitting regions 410 to 440, but to the human eye, all the light emitting regions in the four light emitting regions 410 to 440. The game light emitting units LA1 to LA32 appear to emit light.

Next, based on FIG. 13, the electrical connection state of each output rate lighting unit (lighting unit) LB1 to LB32 of the output rate indicator 300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, the output rate display 300 includes a first common signal line B1, a second common signal line B2, a third common signal line B3, a fourth common signal line B4, and a first data signal line Ba. The second data signal line Bb, the third data signal line Bc, the fourth data signal line Bd, the fifth data signal line Be, the sixth data signal line Bf, the seventh data signal line Bg, and the eighth data signal line Bh are connected. ing. These signal lines B1 to B4 and Ba to Bh are provided on the main control board 80.

Specifically, the first common signal line B1 is connected to the lighting units LB1 to LB8 for each output rate in the first lighting area 310. The second common signal line B2 is connected to the lighting units LB9 to LB16 for each output rate in the second lighting area 320. The third common signal line B3 is connected to the lighting units LB17 to LB24 for each output rate in the third lighting area 330. The fourth common signal line B4 is connected to the lighting units LB25 to LB32 for each output rate in the fourth lighting area 340. The eight data signal lines Ba to Bh from the first data signal line Ba to the eighth data signal line Bh are the eight lighting units LB1 to LB8 for output in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting. Eight output rate lighting units LB9 to LB16 in the area 320, eight output rate lighting units LB17 to LB24 in the third lighting area 330, and eight output rate lighting units LB25 in the fourth lighting area 340. It is connected to ~ LB32 respectively.

With the above-mentioned connection, the game control microcomputer 81 performs dynamic lighting control on the 32 output rate lighting units LB1 to LB32. The dynamic lighting control for the output rate lighting units LB1 to LB32 is the same as the dynamic lighting control for the game light emitting units LA1 to LA32 described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the electrical connection state of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the game control microcomputer 81 includes 8-bit input / output terminals D0 to D7, output terminals PO11, output terminals PO12, output terminals PO13, and many other terminals (for example, a backup power supply). It is equipped with a terminal VBB terminal). The input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the game control microcomputer 81 are connected to the bus line BL, and the data information D [0], D [1], D [2], D [3], D [4], D [5], D [6], and D [7] can be input and output respectively. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 can output 8-bit data information D [0] to D [7] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 to the bus line BL.

In the following, data information D [0] to D [7] will be referred to as data information D [0 ... 7], and data information D [0] to D [3] will be referred to as data information D [0 ... 3]. And. Then, for example, the data information D [0] is simply referred to as the data information D0 by omitting the parentheses. Further, in the present embodiment, the data information D0 = "1" means that the "H" level signal (data information D0) is output, and the data information D0 = "0" means the "L" level signal. It is assumed that (data information D0) is output.

The game control microcomputer 81 can output the select signal XCSE0 from the output terminal PO11, can output the select signal XCSE1 from the output terminal PO12, and can output the select signal XCSE10 from the output terminal PO13. The level of the output select signals XCSE0, XCSE1, and XCSE10 is either "H" level (voltage higher than the upper limit threshold voltage) or "L" level (voltage lower than the lower limit threshold voltage) depending on the game control microcomputer 81. Is set to.

Next, the electrical connection state of the drive circuit 200 of the present embodiment (first embodiment) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 15, the drive circuit 200 includes a light emission selection circuit unit 210 and a light emission drive circuit unit 220 in order to display game information on the game display 40. The drive circuit 200 of the present embodiment is characterized in that it includes a lighting selection circuit unit 230 in order to display the output rate on the output rate display 300.

The light emitting selection circuit unit 210 is a circuit for selecting a light emitting region capable of emitting light from the four light emitting regions 410 to 440 of the game display 40 based on the data information D [0 ... 3]. The light emission selection circuit unit 210 includes a flip-flop (IC1) and a transistor array (IC2).

The IC1 includes 8-bit input terminals 1D to 8D, 8-bit output terminals 1Q to 8Q, a clock input terminal CLK, a clear input terminal CLR, and other terminals (VCC terminal, GND terminal). ing. A bus line BL is connected to the input terminals 1D to 4D of the IC1, and data information D0, D1, D2, and D3 are input respectively. Further, the input terminals 5D to 8D of the IC1 are connected to the ground. On the other hand, four signal transmission lines S1 are connected to the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of the IC1. Further, the output terminals 5Q to 8Q of the IC1 are not connected. A reset signal RST may be input to the clear input terminal CLR of the IC1. Then, the select signal XCSE0 (see FIG. 14) from the game control microcomputer 81 is input to the clock input terminal CLK of the IC1.

This IC1 is a D-type flip-flop, and holds (latches) the data information D [0 ... 3] input from the input terminals 1D to 4D at the rising edge of the select signal XCSE0, and holds the data. Information D [0 ... 3] is output from the output terminals 1Q to 4Q. For IC1, a general-purpose IC such as "SN74HC273N" manufactured by Texas Instruments can be preferably used.

IC2 is a driver that can drive a large current with a small input current, and has 8-bit input terminals IN1 to IN8, 8-bit output terminals O1 to O8, and other terminals (Vs terminal, GND terminal). I have. Four signal transmission lines S1 are connected to the input terminals IN1 to IN4 of the IC2. Further, the input terminals IN5 to IN8 of the IC2 are connected to the ground. On the other hand, the output terminals O1 to O4 of the IC2 have a first common signal line (first light emitting common line) A1, a second common signal line (second light emitting common line) A2, and a third common signal line A3. The fourth common signal line A4 is connected. These common signal lines A1 to A4 are connected to pins 1 to 4 of the connector CN2 and form the same transmission line as the common signal lines A1 to A4 (see FIG. 12) of the game display 40 described above. Further, the output terminals O5 to O8 of the IC2 are not connected. As IC2, for example, a general-purpose IC such as "M54562WP" manufactured by Texas Instruments can be preferably used.

Based on the data information D [0 ... 7], the light emitting drive circuit unit 220 emits eight game light emitting units in the light emitting region selected by the light emitting selection circuit unit 210 among the four light emitting regions 410 to 440. It is a circuit to make it possible. The light emitting drive circuit unit 220 includes a flip-flop (IC3) and a transistor array (IC4).

The IC3 includes 8-bit input terminals 1D to 8D, 8-bit output terminals 1Q to 8Q, a clock input terminal CLK, a clear input terminal CLR, and other terminals (VCC terminal, GND terminal). ing. A bus line BL is connected to the input terminals 1D to 8D of the IC3, and data information D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7 are input respectively. On the other hand, eight signal transmission lines S2 are connected to the output terminals 1Q to 8Q of the IC3, respectively. A reset signal RST may be input to the clear input terminal CLR of the IC3. Then, the select signal XCSE1 (see FIG. 14) from the game control microcomputer 81 is input to the clock input terminal CLK of the IC3.

This IC3 is a D-type flip-flop, and holds (latches) the data information D [0 ... 7] input from the input terminals 1D to 8D at the rising edge of the select signal XCSE1 and holds the data. Information D [0 ... 7] is output from the output terminals 1Q to 8Q. As the IC3, a general-purpose IC such as "SN74HC273N" manufactured by Texas Instruments can be preferably used.

The IC4 is a driver that can drive a large current with a small input current, and has 8-bit input terminals IN1 to IN8, 8-bit output terminals O1 to O8, and other terminals (COM terminal, GND terminal). I have. Eight signal transmission lines S2 are connected to the input terminals IN1 to IN8 of the IC4. On the other hand, the output terminals O1 to O8 of the IC4 are connected to the data signal lines Aa to Ah from the first data signal line Aa to the eighth data signal line Ah. These data signal lines Aa to Ah are connected to pins 5 to 12 of the connector CN2 via a current limiting resistor RR, and are connected to the data signal lines Aa to Ah (see FIG. 12) of the game display 40 described above. It becomes the same transmission line. As the IC4, for example, a general-purpose IC such as "M54585WP" manufactured by Texas Instruments can be preferably used.

The lighting selection circuit unit 230 is a circuit for selecting a lighting area that can be lit from the four lighting areas 310 to 340 of the output rate display 300 based on the data information D [0 ... 3]. The lighting selection circuit unit 230 includes a flip-flop (IC5) and a transistor array (IC6).

The IC5 includes 8-bit input terminals 1D to 8D, 8-bit output terminals 1Q to 8Q, a clock input terminal CLK, a clear input terminal CLR, and other terminals (VCC terminal, GND terminal). ing. A bus line BL is connected to the input terminals 1D to 4D of the IC5, and data information D0, D1, D2, and D3 are input respectively. Further, the input terminals 5D to 8D of the IC 5 are connected to the ground. On the other hand, four signal transmission lines S3 are connected to the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of the IC5, respectively. Further, the output terminals 5Q to 8Q of the IC 5 are not connected. A reset signal RST may be input to the clear input terminal CLR of the IC5. Then, the select signal XCSE10 (see FIG. 14) from the game control microcomputer 81 is input to the clock input terminal CLK of the IC5.

This IC5 is a D-type flip-flop, and holds (latches) the data information D [0 ... 3] input from the input terminals 1D to 4D at the rising edge of the select signal XCSE10, and holds the data. Information D [0 ... 3] is output from the output terminals 1Q to 4Q. As the IC 5, a general-purpose IC such as "SN74HC273N" manufactured by Texas Instruments can be preferably used.

The IC6 is a driver capable of driving a large current with a small input current, and has 8-bit input terminals IN1 to IN8, 8-bit output terminals O1 to O8, and other terminals (Vs terminal, GND terminal). I have. Four signal transmission lines S3 are connected to the input terminals IN1 to IN4 of the IC6. Further, the input terminals IN5 to IN8 of the IC6 are connected to the ground. On the other hand, the output terminals O1 to O4 of the IC 6 have a first common signal line (first lighting common line) B1, a second common signal line (second lighting common line) B2, and a third common signal line B3. The fourth common signal line B4 is connected. These common signal lines B1 to B4 are the same transmission lines as the common signal lines B1 to B4 (see FIG. 13) of the output rate display 300 described above. Further, the output terminals O5 to O8 of the IC 6 are not connected. As the IC6, a general-purpose IC such as "M54562WP" manufactured by Texas Instruments can be preferably used.

In this embodiment, the data signal lines (branched data lines) Ba to Bh are provided so as to branch from the eight data signal lines (data lines) Aa to Ah arranged between the IC 4 and the connector CN2. ing. These data signal lines Ba to Bh are the same transmission lines as the data signal lines Ba to Bh (see FIG. 13) of the output rate display 300 described above. In this way, the signals output from the output terminals O1 to O8 of the IC4 can be transmitted to the game display 40 by the data signal lines Aa to Ah, and can also be transmitted to the output rate display 300 by the data signal lines Ba to Bh. It has become.

4. Dynamic lighting control by the game control microcomputer 81 Next, dynamic lighting control by the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 34. Therefore, first, a case where dynamic lighting control is performed on the game display 40 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 25. Here, as an example, as shown in FIG. 16A, the game light emitting units LA1, LA2, LA5, and LA6 are made to emit light in the first light emitting region 410. That is, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 41a. Next, as shown in FIG. 16B, the game light emitting unit LA15 is made to emit light in the second light emitting region 420. That is, the lost symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 41b. Next, as shown in FIG. 16C, the game light emitting units LA17 and LA20 are made to emit light in the third light emitting region 430. That is, the normal symbol display 42 displays the normal lost symbol, and the first special figure hold display 43a indicates that there is one first special figure hold. Next, as shown in FIG. 16D, the game light emitting units LA25, LA26, LA30, LA31, and LA32 are made to emit light in the fourth light emitting region 440. That is, the right-handed indicator 45 indicates that the player should strike right, and the round indicator 47 indicates that the number of rounds is 16R.

Note that FIG. 17 shows a case where the light emitting state of each game light emitting unit is once cleared. This does not reflect the light emitting state of each game light emitting unit that was emitted in the previous (4 ms before) light emitting region when each game light emitting unit in a certain light emitting region of the game display 40 is made to emit light. To do. In this case, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0000000000] as shown in FIG. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the data information D [00000000000] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of all eight signal transmission lines S2 become "L" level. As a result, the IC4 switches the voltages of all eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to the "L" level, and does not allow a drive current to flow through the eight gaming light emitting units. In this way, the light emitting state of each game light emitting unit is cleared. Since the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 is the same when the lighting state of each output rate lighting unit is once cleared, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned example, when the light emitting region capable of emitting light from the four light emitting regions 410 to 440 is set to the first light emitting region 410, the game control microcomputer 81 emits light in the fourth light emitting region 440 of the previous time (4 ms before). First, the light emitting state is cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the state. Next, as shown in FIG. 18, data information D [0 ... 3] = D [1000] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the data information D [1000] is held by the IC1, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S1 become [HLLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC2 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines A1 to A4 to [HLLL]. In this way, the first light emitting region 410 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 19, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 to 7] = D [11001100]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the data information D [11001100] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HHLLLHHLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to [HHLLLHHLL] and causes a drive current to flow. In this way, the game light emitting units LA1, LA2, LA5, and LA6 emit light in the first light emitting region 410 (see FIG. 16A).

After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the light emitting region that can emit light out of the four light emitting regions 410 to 440 to the second light emitting region 420. In this case, the light emitting state is first cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the light emitting state in the first light emitting region 410 of the previous time (4 ms before). Next, as shown in FIG. 20, data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0100] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the data information D [0100] is held by the IC1, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S1 become [LHLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC2 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines A1 to A4 to [LHLL]. In this way, the second light emitting region 420 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 21, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 to 7] = D [00001000]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the data information D [00001000] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [LLLLHLLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to [LLLLHLLL] and causes a drive current to flow. In this way, in the second light emitting region 420, the game light emitting unit LA15 emits light (see FIG. 16B).

After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the light emitting region capable of emitting light from the four light emitting regions 410 to 440 to the third light emitting region 430. In this case, the light emitting state is first cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the light emitting state in the second light emitting region 420 of the previous time (4 ms before). Next, as shown in FIG. 22, data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0010] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the data information D [0010] is held by the IC1, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S1 become [LLHL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC2 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines A1 to A4 to [LLHL]. In this way, the third light emitting region 430 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 to 7] = D [10010000]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the data information D [10010000] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HLLHLLLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to [HLLHLLLL] and causes a drive current to flow. In this way, the gaming light emitting units LA17 and LA20 emit light in the third light emitting region 430 (see FIG. 16C).

After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the light emitting region that can emit light out of the four light emitting regions 410 to 440 to the fourth light emitting region 440. In this case, the light emitting state is first cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the light emitting state in the third light emitting region 430 last time (4 ms before). Next, as shown in FIG. 24, the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0001] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the data information D [0001] is held by the IC1, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S1 become [LLLH] in order from the top. As a result, the IC2 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines A1 to A4 to [LLLH]. In this way, the fourth light emitting region 440 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 25, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 to 7] = D [11000111]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the data information D [11000111] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HHLLLHHH] in order from the top. As a result, the IC4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to [HHLLLHHH] and causes a drive current to flow. In this way, in the fourth light emitting region 440, the game light emitting units LA25, LA26, LA30, LA31, and LA32 emit light (see FIG. 16D). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 will perform light emission control in the first light emitting region 410, light emission control in the second light emitting region 420, light emission control in the third light emitting region 430, and fourth light emission every 4 ms, as described above. The light emission control in the region 440 will be repeated.

Next, a case where dynamic lighting control is performed on the output rate display 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 34. Here, as an example, as shown in FIG. 26 (A), the output rate lighting units LB1, LB3, LB4, LB5, LB6, LB7 are lit in the first lighting area 310. That is, "6" is displayed in the first lighting area 310. Next, as shown in FIG. 26B, the output rate lighting units LB9, LB10, LB11, LB12, LB13, and LB14 are lit in the second lighting area 320. That is, "0" is displayed in the second lighting area 320. Next, as shown in FIG. 26C, the output rate lighting units LB17, LB18, LB20, LB21, and LB23 are lit in the third lighting area 330. That is, "2" is displayed in the third lighting area 330. Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (D), the output rate lighting units LB26 and LB27 are lit in the fourth lighting area 340. That is, "1" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340.

In the above-described example, when the lighting area that can be lit out of the four lighting areas 310 to 340 is set to the first lighting area 310, the game control microcomputer 81 lights in the fourth lighting area 340 of the previous time (4 ms before). First, the lighting state is cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the state. Next, as shown in FIG. 27, the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [1000] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the data information D [1000] is held by the IC 5, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S3 become [HLLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 6 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines B1 to B4 to [HLLL]. In this way, the first lighting area 310 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 28, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 to 7] = D [10111110]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the data information D [10111110] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HLHHHHHL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Ba to Bh to [HLHHHHHL] and causes a drive current to flow. In this way, in the first lighting area 310, the output rate lighting units LB1, LB3, LB4, LB5, LB6, and LB7 are lit (see FIG. 26A).

After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the lighting area 320 among the four lighting areas 310 to 340 to be the second lighting area 320. In this case, the lighting state is first cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the lighting state in the first lighting area 310 last time (4 ms before). Next, as shown in FIG. 29, the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0100] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the data information D [0100] is held by the IC5, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S3 become [LHLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 6 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines B1 to B4 to [LHLL]. In this way, the second lighting area 320 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 30, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 to 7] = D [11111100]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the data information D [11111100] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HHHHHHLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Ba to Bh to [HHHHHHLL] and causes a drive current to flow. In this way, in the second lighting area 320, the output rate lighting units LB9, LB10, LB11, LB12, LB13, and LB14 are lit (see FIG. 26B).

After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the lighting area that can be lit out of the four lighting areas 310 to 340 to the third lighting area 330. In this case, the lighting state is first cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the lighting state in the second lighting area 320 of the previous time (4 ms before). Next, as shown in FIG. 31, data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0010] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the data information D [0010] is held by the IC 5, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S3 become [LLHL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 6 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines B1 to B4 to [LLHL]. In this way, the third lighting area 330 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 32, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 to 7] = D [11011010]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the data information D [11011010] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HHLHHLHL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Ba to Bh to [HHLHHLHL] and causes a drive current to flow. In this way, in the third lighting area 330, the output rate lighting units LB17, LB18, LB20, LB21, and LB23 are lit (see FIG. 26C).

After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the lighting area that can be lit out of the four lighting areas 310 to 340 to the fourth lighting area 340. In this case, the lighting state is first cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the lighting state in the third lighting area 330 last time (4 ms before). Next, as shown in FIG. 33, the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0001] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the data information D [0001] is held by the IC 5, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S3 become [LLLH] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 6 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines B1 to B4 to [LLLH]. In this way, the fourth lighting area 340 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 34, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 to 7] = D [01100,000]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the data information D [01100,000] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [LHHLLLLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Ba to Bh to [LHHLLLLL] and causes a drive current to flow. In this way, in the fourth lighting area 340, the output rate lighting units LB26 and LB27 are lit (see FIG. 26 (D)). After that, as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 has lighting control in the first lighting area 310, lighting control in the second lighting area 320, lighting control in the third lighting area 330, and fourth lighting every 4 ms. The lighting control in the area 340 will be repeated.

5. Technical Significance of Drive Circuit 200 Next, the technical significance of the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of this embodiment will be described. Therefore, it will be described while comparing with the first comparative example and the second comparative example. As a first comparative example, a drive circuit 200X as shown in FIG. 35 can be considered. In addition to the existing circuits of the light emission selection circuit unit 210 and the light emission drive circuit unit 220 described above, the drive circuit 200X selects a lighting area that can be lit from the four lighting areas 310 to 340 of the output rate display 300. It includes a selection circuit unit 210X and a lighting drive circuit unit 220X that enables lighting of each of the eight lighting units for output rates in the selected lighting region.

The lighting selection circuit unit 210X has the same configuration as the light emission selection circuit unit 210, and includes a flip-flop (IC1X) and a transistor array (ICX2). Further, the lighting drive circuit unit 220X has the same configuration as the light emitting drive circuit unit 220, and includes a flip-flop (IC3X) and a transistor array (IC4X). The connection between the lighting selection circuit unit 210X and the lighting drive circuit unit 220X and the output rate display 300 is exactly the same as the connection between the light emission selection circuit unit 210 and the light emission drive circuit unit 220 and the game display 40. .. Therefore, in the drive circuit 200X of the first comparative example, four ICs are newly added to the existing four ICs (integrated circuits) for causing the game display 40 to emit light.

By the way, the main control board 80 has large technical restrictions, and each manufacturer designs the main control board 80 so as to exhibit the maximum performance within the technical restrictions. Therefore, the main control board 80 does not have much space for newly arranging the output rate display 300 and its drive circuit. Therefore, it is conceivable to use a main control board larger than the existing main control board 80, but a design change due to the size of the main control board affects the design of other control boards, resulting in enormous cost. Will take. Therefore, it is realistic to bring together the parts on the existing main control board 80 to create a space. However, if the parts are too dense, they will be vulnerable to noise. That is, if each component of the main control board is too dense, the ground will be reduced and the design will be vulnerable to noise. From the above viewpoint, it is desirable that the number of new components arranged on the main control board 80 is as small as possible.

Therefore, according to the drive circuit 200 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, two ICs (lighting selection circuit units) are used as opposed to the existing four ICs (integrated circuits) for causing the game display 40 to emit light. Only 230) is added. That is, by connecting the data signal lines Ba to Bh branched from the data signal lines Aa to Ah to the output rate display 300, the lighting drive circuit unit 220X (see FIG. 35) as in the first comparative example is omitted. There is. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of ICs to be added as compared with the drive circuit 200X of the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, and it is possible to facilitate mounting on the main control board 80 from the viewpoint of arrangement space. .. Then, it is possible to prevent each component on the main control board 80 from being too densely packed, and to prevent the design from becoming vulnerable to noise as much as possible.

Further, as a second comparative example, it is conceivable to perform dynamic lighting control as shown in FIG. That is, in the second comparative example, first, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), light emission control is performed in the first light emitting region 410 of the game display 40. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), light emission control in the second light emitting region 420 is performed. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36C, light emission control in the third light emitting region 430 is performed. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36 (D), light emission control is performed in the fourth light emitting region 440. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36 (E), lighting control is performed in the first lighting area 310 of the output rate display 300. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36 (F), lighting control is performed in the second lighting area 320. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36 (G), lighting control is performed in the third lighting region 330. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36 (H), lighting control is performed in the fourth lighting region 340. After that, the dynamic lighting control shown in FIGS. 36 (A) to 36 (H) is repeated in the same manner. Therefore, in the second comparative example, focusing on a certain light emitting region or lighting region, light emission control or lighting control is performed at a cycle of 32 ms.

However, in the dynamic lighting control of the second comparative example, the cycle of light emission control (lighting control) is long, and there is a risk that the display on the game display 40 and the display on the output rate display 300 may blink. That is, despite the situation where the game display 40 shows the state of continuing to emit light, the situation where the game display 40 shows the state of continuing to light, or the situation where the output rate display 300 continues to light. It could appear to be blinking.

Therefore, according to the drive circuit 200 of the present embodiment, the light emission control or the lighting control is performed at a cycle of 16 ms in a certain light emitting region or lighting region. That is, the light emission control in the light emitting areas 410 to 440 of the game display 40 and the lighting control in the lighting areas 310 to 340 of the output rate display 300 are selectively executed, and the same cycle as the conventional one ( Dynamic lighting control is possible with 16 ms). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display on the game display 40 and the display on the output rate display 300 from blinking. In short, the technical significance of the drive circuit 200 of this embodiment is that the game display 40 or the output rate display 300 is mounted on the main control board 80 while avoiding a longer period of dynamic lighting control than before. It is to be able to realize space saving.

6. Explanation of jackpot, etc. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, there are "big hit" and "missing" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). At the time of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When it is "off", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. If you win the jackpot, the jackpot game (1st jackpot 30 and 2nd jackpot 35) will be opened with an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) displayed as a stop. Is executed. The jackpot game is also called a special game.

In this form, the jackpot game consists of multiple round games (unit open game), an opening before the first round game is started (also referred to as OP), and an ending after the final round game is completed. (Also referred to as ED) and is included. Each round game begins with the end of the OP or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ED. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. 37. As shown in FIG. 37, there are roughly two types in this embodiment. It is a specific jackpot and a normal jackpot. The specific jackpot is also called "V long jackpot", and the normal jackpot is also called "V short jackpot". The "V long jackpot" is a jackpot that operates the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 in a first opening pattern (V long opening pattern) that allows the game ball to easily pass through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. .. The "V short jackpot" is a jackpot that operates the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 in a second opening pattern (V short opening pattern) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. is there.

More specifically, the "V long jackpot" that can be won in the lottery of special figure 1 (lottery of the first special symbol) is a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R from the 1R to 8R. From 9R to 15R, the 1st prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 16R (final round), the 2nd prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. It's a big hit. That is, although the total number of rounds of this jackpot is 16R, the actual number of rounds is 9R. The actual number of rounds is the number of rounds in which a game ball can win up to the maximum number of winnings per round (8 in this embodiment). In this V-long jackpot, from 9R to 15R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and it is a round in which no prize ball can be expected. In 16R, it is possible to easily pass through the specific area 39 in the second large winning opening 35. Further, when the "specific jackpot" is won by the lottery of the special figure 1, the "special figure 1_specific symbol" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a.

In addition, the "V long jackpot" that can be won in the lottery of special figure 2 (lottery of the second special symbol) opens the first jackpot 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R from 1R to 15R. In 16R (final round), it is a big hit that opens the second big winning opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. In other words, this jackpot has a substantial number of rounds of 16R. Of course, in 16R, it is possible to easily pass through the specific area 39 in the second large winning opening 35. When the "specific jackpot" is won by the lottery of the special figure 2, the "special figure 2_specific symbol" is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b.

On the other hand, the "V short jackpot" that can be won in the lottery of Special Figure 1 opens the first prize opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R from 1R to 8R, and from 9R to 15R. The first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 16R (final round), the second big winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per 1R. That is, although the total number of rounds of this jackpot is 16R, the actual number of rounds is 8R.

In the 16R in this V short jackpot, the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 is extremely short, and it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 in the second big winning opening 35. In 16R in the V short jackpot, not only the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 is short, but also the opening timing of the second big winning opening 35 and the operation timing of the distribution member 71 (second state (FIG. 4). From the relationship (see (B)) to the first state (timing controlled from the first state (see FIG. 4 (A))), it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39. When the "normal jackpot" is won by the lottery of the special figure 1, the "special figure 1_normal symbol" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 during the jackpot game, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is shifted to the high probability state described later. Therefore, when the above-mentioned V-long jackpot is won, the gaming state after the jackpot game can be shifted to the high probability state by passing the game ball to the specific area 39 during the execution of the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the V short jackpot is won, the game ball cannot be passed to the specific area 39 during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the game state after the jackpot game is the normal probability state described later. (Non-high probability state).

However, even when it is controlled to the normal probability state, it is controlled to the time saving state described later. In this case, the number of time reductions is set to 100 times. The number of time reductions is the maximum number of times the variation display of the special symbol is executed in the time reduction state.

As shown in FIG. 37, the lottery distribution rate of the special figure 1 is 50% for the V long jackpot (specific jackpot) and 50% for the V short jackpot (normal jackpot). On the other hand, all the jackpots won in the lottery of Special Figure 2 are V-long jackpots (specific jackpots). In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball is won in the second starting port 21 rather than the big hit lottery (lottery in Special Figure 1) in which the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The jackpot lottery (lottery of Special Figure 2) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lottery for whether or not it is a big hit is performed based on the "big hit random number", and the lottery for the winning jackpot type is performed based on the "win type random number". As shown in FIG. 38 (A), the jackpot random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The hit type random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 9. The random numbers acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 include "reach random numbers" and "variable pattern random numbers" in addition to the jackpot random numbers and the hit type random numbers.

The reach random number is a random number that determines whether or not to generate reach in the effect symbol variation effect that indicates the result when the result of the jackpot determination is out of order. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed out of a plurality of effect symbols, and a big hit is won depending on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") that is a combination of the effect symbols shown. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is slightly shaken in the display screen 7a, or may be displayed so as to be repeatedly enlarged and reduced. This reach random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255.

Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage to the gate 28 include ordinary symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) shown in FIG. 38 (B). The ordinary symbol random number is a random number for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22. Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of 0 to 65535.

7. Description of Game State Next, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. The special symbol display 41 and the normal symbol display 42 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 have a probability variation function and a variation time shortening function, respectively. The state in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol display 41 is operating is referred to as a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not operating is referred to as a "normal probability state (non-high probability state)". In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal probability state. That is, the jackpot determination is performed using a jackpot determination table in which the value of the jackpot random number determined to be a jackpot is larger than the jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (see FIG. 39 (A)). That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol display 41 is activated, the probability that the display result (that is, the stop symbol) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol by the special symbol display 41 becomes a jackpot symbol as compared with the case where it is not activated. Will be higher.

Further, the state in which the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol display 41 is operating is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the special symbol display 41 is not operating is referred to as a "non-time saving state". In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. That is, the fluctuation pattern is determined by using the special figure fluctuation pattern table in which the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time reduction state (see FIG. 40). That is, when the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol display 41 is activated, it becomes easier to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol as compared with the case where the special symbol display 41 is not activated. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol display 41 may be operated at the same time, or only one of them may be operated. Then, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42 operate in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol display 41. That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42 operate in the time saving state and do not operate in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is higher than in the non-time-saving state. That is, the hit judgment (judgment of the normal symbol) is performed using the normal symbol hit judgment table in which the value of the normal symbol random number (win random number) judged to be a hit is larger than the normal symbol hit judgment table used in the non-time saving state ( See FIG. 39 (C)). That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 42 becomes a normal hit symbol is higher than when it is not activated. ..

Also, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 4 seconds in the non-time saving state, but 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 39 (D)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 41). That is, the opening time extension function of the electric chew 22 is operating. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time-saving state (see FIG. 41). That is, the function of increasing the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened is operating.

In the situation where the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extending function and the opening number increasing function of the electric chew 22 are operating, compared with the case where these functions are not operating. As a result, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened, and the game ball frequently wins a prize at the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these functions are operating is referred to as the "high base state", and the state in which these functions are not operating is referred to as the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports winning a prize in the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. Therefore, the high base state is also referred to as an electric support control state or a ball entry easy state. On the other hand, the low base state is also called a non-electric support control state or a non-ball entry easy state.

The high base state does not have to activate all of the above functions. That is, the operation of one or more of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension function of the electric chew 22, and the opening frequency increasing function of the electric chew 22. It suffices if the electric chew 22 is opened more easily than when the function is not operating. Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V-long jackpot is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base if the passage to the specific area 39 is made during the jackpot game. It is in a state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy and high base state". The high-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (160 times in this embodiment), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.

In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V-short jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, that is, if the specific area 39 is not passed (not necessarily done) during the jackpot game. It is a low-probability state), a short time state, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low accuracy and high base state". The low accuracy high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.

When playing the pachinko gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state may be referred to as a "normal game state". In addition, the state in which the special game (big hit game) is being executed is referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Further, a state controlled by at least one of a high probability state and a high base state is referred to as a "privilege gaming state".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (see FIG. 3) by hitting right. This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. .. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which is an opportunity for the normal symbol lottery, a right-handed hit is performed so that the game ball is won in the second starting port 21. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes (winning to the starting port) rather than hitting left. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the game is played by right-handed even during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (see FIG. 3) by hitting the left side. Since the electric support control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first starting port 20 than to win the second starting port 21. Because it has become. Therefore, a left-handed strike is performed so that the game ball can be won in the first starting port 20. This allows you to get more start-up prizes than hitting right.

8. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 [Main Control Main Processing] Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 56. The main counters, timers, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM 84. The initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1". When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 42 from the ROM 83. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, first, the power-on process described later is performed (S001).

Then, following the power-on processing (S001), interrupts are disabled (S002), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing is executed (S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003), various random number counter values shown in FIG. 38 are added and updated by 1. When each random number counter value reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, interrupts are enabled (S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU 82 at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, between the end of the main timer interrupt process (S005) and the start of the next main timer interrupt process (S005), various counters by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003). The value update process is repeatedly executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S004).

Here, before explaining the power-on processing (S001), a point of checking whether or not the stored contents of the special memory 89, which is one of the features of this embodiment, is correct will be described. In this embodiment, not only the checksum of the RAM 84 (hereinafter referred to as “game RAM 84”) is calculated and stored, but also the checksum of the special memory 89 is calculated and stored when the power is cut off due to the end of business or a power failure. It is supposed to be done. The checksum is one of the error detection codes calculated to check the reliability of each stored data (command, etc.). In this embodiment, each data stored in the gaming RAM 84 or the special memory 89 is regarded as a hexadecimal numerical value, and the sum of these numerical values is used as a checksum. However, the checksum may be a value calculated by another method.

In this embodiment, the checksum of the special memory 89 is calculated when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off. Then, it is checked whether or not the checksum value of the special memory 89 calculated at this time matches the checksum value stored at the time of power failure. As a result, if the checksum values match, the stored contents of the special memory 89 (the value of the counter for 100 balls, the value of the actual total prize ball counter, the value of the prize ball counter, the continuous prize) It is judged that the value of the ball count counter, the value of the fluctuation count counter, etc.) is normal. As a result, it is possible to display the output rate with the correct stored contents of the special memory 89. On the other hand, if the checksum values do not match, it is determined that the stored contents of the special memory 89 are abnormal. As a result, it is possible to erase the stored contents of the special memory 89 and avoid displaying the output rate with the incorrect stored contents.

[Power-on processing] As shown in FIG. 43, in the power-on processing (S001), first, access permission setting to the game RAM 84 and the special memory 89 is set (S011). This makes it possible to write and read information to the gaming RAM 84 and the special memory 89. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated (whether or not it is ON) (S012). That is, it is determined whether or not a signal based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 is received from the power supply board 150. If the RAM clear switch 152 is operated (YES in S012), the process proceeds to step S018. On the other hand, if it is not operated (NO in S012), it is subsequently determined whether or not the power off flag is ON (S013). The power-off flag is a flag indicating the occurrence of power-off, and is a flag that is turned on in the power-off monitoring process (see FIG. 56) described later.

If the power off flag is not ON (NO in S013), the power may not be cut off normally, so the process proceeds to step S018. On the other hand, if the power off flag is ON (YES in S013), the checksum of the game RAM 84 is calculated (S014), and the checksum of the game RAM 84 stored (stored) at the time of power interruption ( (See step S2903 in FIG. 56) (S015). If the values of these checksums do not match (NO in S015), it is determined that the stored contents of the gaming RAM 84 are abnormal, and the process proceeds to step S018. On the other hand, if the checksum values match (YES in S015), it is determined that the stored contents of the gaming RAM 84 are normal, and the process proceeds to step S016.

In step S016, the setting management of the work area of the game RAM 84 at the time of power recovery is performed. In this setting process, the power recovery information is read from the ROM 83, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the gaming RAM 84. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the power off flag (S017), and proceeds to step S021.

On the other hand, in step S018, all the information stored in the gaming RAM 84 is cleared (S018). However, at this time, the stored contents of the special memory 89 (the value of the counter for 100 balls, the value of the actual total prize ball counter, the value of the prize ball counter, the value of the continuous prize ball counter, the fluctuation count counter The value, the prize ratio, and the continuous prize ratio (see FIG. 11C)) are not cleared. As described above, even if the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on, the output rate can be calculated as a converged value by not clearing the stored contents of the special memory 89. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 initially sets the work area of the game RAM 84 (S019). In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the ROM 83 is set in the work area of the gaming RAM 84. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a RAM clear notification command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of clearing the stored contents of the game RAM 84 in the output buffer (S020), and proceeds to step S021.

In step S021, the game control microcomputer 81 calculates the checksum of the special memory 89 and stores (stores) it at the time of power failure. The checksum of the checksum storage area of the special memory 89 (FIG. 56). Match with (see step S2905) (S022). If the values of these checksums do not match (NO in S022), it is determined that the stored contents of the special memory 89 are abnormal, and all the information stored in the special memory 89 is cleared (S023). That is, the value of each counter shown in FIG. 11C is reset to "0", and the information stored in each storage area is erased. In this way, as described above, it is possible to avoid displaying the output rate with the incorrect stored contents of the special memory 89. Then, a special memory clear command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of clearing the stored contents of the special memory 89 is set in the output buffer (S024), and the process proceeds to step S025. On the other hand, if the checksum values match in step S022, it is determined that the stored contents of the special memory 89 are normal, the processes of steps S023 and S024 are passed, and the process proceeds to step S025.

In step S025, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process by, for example, setting the CPU 82, setting the SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing the interrupt time), and the like as other initial settings.

[Main-side timer interrupt processing] Next, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 44, in the main timer interrupt process (S005), first, the input process described later is executed (S101). Then, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S102) is executed in the same manner as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of FIG. 42. Next, the start port sensor detection process described later is executed (S103), and the normal operation process is executed (S104).

The normal operation process (S104) is mainly a process for determining a normal symbol random number acquired by the start port sensor process (S103) and displaying a normal symbol (variable display and stop display) indicating the determination result. To execute. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for performing the fluctuation display of the normal symbol at the timing of starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, and the data information is used in the game RAM 84. It is set in the third game data storage area (see FIG. 11B). The third game data storage area of the game RAM 84 is a storage area for storing data information for causing each of the game light emitting units LA17 to LA24 of the third light emitting area 430 (see FIG. 12) including the normal symbol display 42 to emit light. Is. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 stops and displays the normal symbol (normal hit symbol or normal lost symbol) indicating the determination result of the normal symbol lottery at the timing when the stop display of the normal symbol is started (light emission data). ) Is created, and the data information is set in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes a special operation process described later (S105) after the normal operation process (S104). Next, the specific area sensor detection process is executed (S106). In the specific area sensor detection process (S106), it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a, and if it is detected, the V flag indicating the transition to the high probability state is turned ON. Further, when the V flag is turned ON, a V-pass command for causing the sub-control board 90 to notify the V-pass is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 84.

After the specific area sensor detection process (S106), the game control microcomputer 81 executes an output process (S107) and a power failure monitoring process (S108) described later. After that, other processing (S109) is executed to end the main timer interrupt processing (S005). Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU 82, the processes of steps S002 to S004 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 42), and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 msec), the main control is performed again. The side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed.

[Input processing] As shown in FIG. 45, in the input processing (S101), first, various sensors (first start port sensor 20a, second start port sensor 21a, first large) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are attached. The detection signal detected by the winning opening sensor 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the normal winning opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 9) is read (S110). Then, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is a prize detection signal related to the payout of the prize ball (S111). If it is not a winning detection signal (NO in S111), other processing (S122) is executed and the process proceeds to step S118. For example, if it is a fraud detection signal detected by a magnetic sensor, an impact sensor, or the like, a process for performing fraud notification is executed as another process (S122).

On the other hand, if it is a winning detection signal (YES in S111), the prize ball counter addition table shown in FIG. 11A is referred to (S112). As shown in FIG. 11 (A), the prize ball counter addition table shows the number of prize balls according to the type of winning opening, and also includes a counter for 100 balls, a prize ball number counter, and a continuous prize ball number. It is a table showing which of the counters the number of prize balls is counted up (added). After referring to the prize ball counter addition table (S112), a prize ball command for paying out the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 84. This prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 110 by the output process (S107) described later.

After step S113, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the prize ball counter addition process described later based on the referenced prize ball counter addition table (S114). Then, it is determined whether or not the game machine frame 50 is open (the inner frame 52 is open with respect to the outer frame 51), that is, whether or not there is detection by the frame open detection switch 50a (S115). If there is a detection (YES in S115), then it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S116). The customer waiting flag is a flag indicating that the customer waiting state is in a state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed. If the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S116), the output rate calculation process described later is executed (S117), and the process proceeds to step S118. On the other hand, if there is no detection by the frame opening detection switch 50a (NO in S115) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S116), the process proceeds to step S118 without executing the output rate calculation process (S117).

That is, in this embodiment, the output rate calculation process (S117, specific calculation process) is performed only when the display condition that the game machine frame 50 is open and the customer is waiting is satisfied. This is based on the following reasons. That is, the gaming control microcomputer 81 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a limited processing capacity. Then, during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol or during the control to the jackpot game state (game control state), the control process having a larger load on the game control microcomputer 81 is being executed than in the customer waiting state. Therefore, in addition to the control processing (specific control processing) related to the fluctuation display of the special symbol or the control processing during the control of the jackpot game state (specific control processing), the game control microcomputer 81 is divided by a large load. If the output rate calculation process (S117) that performs the process is executed, there is a possibility that the processing load will be excessive. From the above, in the game control state where the load of the control process is heavy, the payout rate calculation process (S117) is not performed, and in the customer waiting state where the load of the control process is light, the payout rate calculation process (S117) is performed. It is possible to distribute the load of the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81. Further, as will be described later, when the game machine frame 50 is closed or not in the waiting state for customers (when the display condition is not satisfied), the output rate (accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio) is displayed on the output rate display 300. Is not displayed. Therefore, when the output rate is not displayed, the output rate calculation process (S117) is not executed to prevent unnecessary control processing.

In step S118, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated. If it is not operated (NO in S118), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is operated (YES in S118), it is determined whether or not the display flag at the present time is "1" (S119). The display flag indicates a value of either "1" or "2". If the display flag is "1" (YES in S119), the display flag is switched to "2" (S120), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S119), the display flag is switched to "1" (S121), and this process ends. That is, each time the RAM clear switch 152 is operated, the display flag is switched to "1" or "2".

Here, the relationship between the display flag and the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 will be described. When displaying the output rate as described later, if the display flag is "1", the accessory ratio is displayed, and if the display flag is "2", the continuous accessory ratio is displayed. There is. Therefore, each time a person who confirms the output rate operates the RAM clear switch 152, it is possible to switch between the display of the accessory ratio and the display of the continuous accessory ratio. In the past, the RAM clear switch 152 was only operated when the power was turned on. Therefore, in this embodiment, the existing RAM clear switch 152 is effectively used as an operation means for switching between the display of the accessory ratio and the display of the continuous accessory ratio without providing a new switch.

[Prize ball counter addition process] As shown in FIG. 46, in the prize ball counter addition process (S114), first, the type of the winning detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 45 and the prize shown in FIG. 11 (A). The value of the 100-ball counter is added based on the ball counter addition table (S201). For example, in the case of winning the normal winning opening 27, the value of the 100-ball counter is added by "8", and in the case of winning the first large winning opening 30, the value of the 100-ball counter is set to "15". "Is added. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the 100-ball counter is "100" or more (S202). If it is less than "100" (NO in S202), the process proceeds to step S205. On the other hand, if it is "100" or more (YES in S202), the value of the actual total prize ball counter is added by "1", and the value of the 100 ball counter is subtracted by "100" to step S205. move on. In this way, it is possible to measure the total number of prize balls acquired by the player as one in units of 100 balls.

In step S205, it is determined whether or not the prize is won in the large winning opening (first large winning opening 30 or second large winning opening 35). If the prize is won in the big prize opening (YES in S205), the value of the prize ball counter is added by "15" (S206), and the value of the continuous prize ball counter is added by "15". Then (S207), this process is completed. On the other hand, if it is not a prize in the large winning opening (NO in S205), it is subsequently determined whether or not the winning is in the electric chew 22 (second starting opening 21) (S208). If the prize is won in the electric chew 22 (YES in S208), the value of the prize ball counter is added by "7" (S209), and this process is completed. On the other hand, if it is not a prize to the electric chew 22 (S208), since it is a prize to the normal winning opening 27 or the first starting opening 20, the character prize ball counter or the continuous character prize ball counter is used. This process ends without adding.

[Output Rate Calculation Process] As shown in FIG. 47, in the output rate calculation process (S117), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the actual total prize ball counter is "1" or more (S301). If it is "1" or more (YES in S301), the accessory ratio calculation process is executed (S302). Specifically, the value of the bonus ball number counter is divided by the value of the actual total prize ball counter. As a result, it is possible to easily calculate the accessory ratio as the value of the percentage without performing the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. In the calculated accessory ratio, the value with the first decimal place is rounded off. Then, the value of the accessory ratio is stored in the accessory ratio storage area (see FIG. 11C) of the special memory 89 (S303).

Subsequently, the continuous accessory ratio calculation process is executed (S304). Specifically, the value of the continuous prize ball counter is divided by the value of the actual total prize ball counter. As a result, it is possible to easily calculate the continuous accessory ratio as the value of the percentage without performing the multiplication process of 100 times. In the calculated continuous accessory ratio, the value with the first decimal place is rounded off. Then, the value of the continuous bonus ratio is stored in the continuous bonus ratio storage area (see FIG. 11C) of the special memory (S305), and this process is completed. On the other hand, if the value of the actual total prize ball counter is not "1" or more in step S301, it means "0", and this process ends. That is, when the value of the actual total prize ball counter is "0", the process cannot be divided by the value of the denominator which is "0" in the process of step S302 or S304, so that the process is immediately terminated.

[Starting port sensor detection process] As shown in FIG. 48, in the starting port sensor detection process (S103), first, whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. Is determined (S401). If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S401), the gate passing process (S402) is performed. On the other hand, if the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S401), it passes the gate passing process (S402) and proceeds to step S403. In the gate passage process (S402), if the gate sensor 28a is turned on, the normal symbol random numbers (see FIG. 38 (B)) are acquired on condition that the number of ordinary symbol random numbers already stored is less than four. , Stored in the Fluxgate hold storage unit 86. At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the normal drawing hold, and sets the data information in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84.

In step S403, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second start port sensor 21a (S403). If the game ball has not won in the second starting port 21 (NO in S403), the process proceeds to step S407, but if the game ball has won in the second starting port 21 (YES in S403), special figure 2 Whether or not the number of reserved balls (the number of the second special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the second special figure hold provided in the gaming RAM 84) has reached "4" (upper limit storage number). Is determined (S404). Then, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 has reached "4" (YES in S404), the process proceeds to step S407, but when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is less than "4" (in S404). NO), special figure 2 Add 1 to the number of reserved balls (S405). At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the second special figure hold, and sets the data information in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84. ..

Subsequently, the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S406) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S406), the jackpot random number counter value (label-TRND-A), the hit type random number counter value (label-TRND-AS), the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC), and the fluctuation. The pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is acquired (that is, the random number value group shown in FIG. 38 (A) is acquired), and the acquired random number value is used as the current special figure in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b. 2 Stored in the storage area of the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b according to the number of reserved balls.

Subsequently, in the start port sensor detection process (S103), it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a (S407). .. If the game ball does not win in the first starting port 20 (NO in S407), the process ends, but if the game ball wins in the first starting port 20 (YES in S407), special figure 1 is suspended. Whether or not the number of balls (the number of the first special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the first special figure hold provided in the gaming RAM 84) has reached "4" (upper limit storage number). Judge (S408). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 reaches "4" (YES in S408), the process ends, but when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than "4" (NO in S408). ), Add "1" to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 (S409). At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the first special figure hold, and sets the data information in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84. ..

Subsequently, the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S410) is performed. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S410), the jackpot random number counter value (label-TRND-A) and the hit type random number counter value (label-TRND-AS) are the same as in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S406). , Acquire the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (that is, acquire the random number value group shown in FIG. 38 (A)), and obtain the acquired random number values. It is stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a according to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a.

[Special operation processing] As shown in FIG. 49, in the special operation processing (S105), the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the large prize device (first large prize device 31 and second large prize device 36) is divided into four stages. It is divided and "special operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the "special operation status" is "1" (YES in S1301), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special symbol standby process (S1302), and the "special operation status" is "2". In the case (NO in S1301, YES in S1303), special symbol change processing (S1304) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1301 and S1303, YES in S1305). , The special symbol determination process (S1306) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "4" (all of S1301, S1303, S1305 are NO), the special electric accessory process (S1307) is performed. The special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby process] As shown in FIG. 50, in the special symbol standby process (S1302), first, whether or not the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 2) is "0". Is determined (S1401). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (YES in S1401), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1) is "0" (that is, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1). S1407). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is also "0" (YES in S1407), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1416). If it is ON (YES in S1416), this process is completed. If it is not ON (NO in S1416), the customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1417) and this process is completed.

If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not "0" in step S1401 (NO in S1401), the special figure 2 jackpot determination process is executed (S1402). In the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402), the jackpot random number counter value (see FIG. 38 (A)) is read out to determine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. If it is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned ON and the hit type random number counter value (see FIG. 38 (A)) is read to determine the hit type. Next, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1403), the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 is selected by the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 40 and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (see FIG. 38 (A)). ..

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the number of reserved balls in FIG. 2 by 1 (S1404). At this time, data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the second special figure hold is created, and the data information is set in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84. Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted by one to the side read from the current position, and the first reservation in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is performed. Clear the storage area corresponding to (S1405). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1406), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1406), the special operation status is set to “2” and the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 84. At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for displaying the variation of the second special symbol, and stores the data information in the second game data storage area of the game RAM 84 (FIG. 11 (B). ) Refer to). The second game data storage area of the game RAM 84 is a storage area for storing data information for causing the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 of the second special symbol display 41b (see FIG. 12) to emit light.

Further, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not "0" (YES in S1401 and NO in S1407), the special figure 1 jackpot determination process is executed (S1408). In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408), the jackpot random number counter value (see FIG. 38 (A)) is read out to determine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. If it is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned ON and the hit type random number counter value (see FIG. 38 (A)) is read to determine the hit type. Next, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1409), the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 is selected by the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 40 and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (see FIG. 38 (A)). ..

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the number of reserved balls in FIG. 1 by 1 (S1410). At this time, data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the first special figure hold is created, and the data information is set in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84. Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is shifted by one to the side read from the current position, and the first reservation in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is performed. Clear the storage area corresponding to (S1411). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1412), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1412), the special operation status is set to “2” and the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 84. At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for displaying the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and stores the data information in the first game data storage area of the game RAM 84 (FIG. 11 (B). ) Refer to). The first game data storage area of the game RAM 84 is a storage area for storing data information for causing the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 of the first special symbol display 41a (see FIG. 12) to emit light.

In step S1413, the value of the fluctuation count counter of the special memory 89 is increased by “1”. In this way, the number of fluctuations (the number of fluctuations displayed in the special symbol) since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is first turned on is counted. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1414), if it is ON (YES in S1414), the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1415), and this process is completed.

In the special symbol changing process (S1304) shown in FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has elapsed. If the fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation stop command is set in the output buffer, and the special operation status is set to "3". At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for stopping and displaying the first special symbol indicating the result of the lottery of the special figure 1 at the timing of stopping and displaying the first special symbol. Then, the data information is set in the first game data storage area of the game RAM 84. On the other hand, if it is the timing to stop and display the second special symbol, data information (light emission data) for performing the stop display of the second special symbol indicating the result of the lottery of the special figure 2 is created, and the data information is displayed. It is set in the second game data storage area of the game RAM 84.

In the special symbol determination process (S1306) shown in FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the stopped special symbol is a jackpot symbol, and if it is a jackpot symbol, the special operation status is set in order to execute the special electric accessory process (S1307). Set to "4". At this time, the jackpot opening command is set in the output buffer. If it is not a jackpot symbol, the special operation status is set to "1" in order to execute the special symbol standby process (S1302) again. In the special symbol confirmation process (S1306), in order to manage the control period in the high probability state, the probability change counter value is decremented by 1 if the probability change flag is ON, and the probability change flag is set if it becomes "0". Turn off. Further, in order to manage the control period of the time saving state (that is, the high base state), if the time saving flag is ON, the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1, and if it becomes "0", the time saving flag is turned off. Also, when the special operation status is set to "4", if the probability change flag or the time saving flag is ON, it is returned to OFF. That is, it is controlled to a low accuracy and low base state during the jackpot game.

In this special symbol determination process (S1306), when the game control microcomputer 81 changes the game state, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for displaying the game state, and uses the data information for the game. It is set in the fourth game data storage area (see FIG. 11B) of the RAM 84. The fourth game data storage area of the game RAM 84 is a storage area for storing data information for causing each game light emitting unit LA25 to LA32 of the fourth light emitting area 440 (see FIG. 12) including the game state display 46 to emit light. Is. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for displaying that it is in a state where it should be hit right when starting a big hit game, and the data information is used as the first of the game RAM 84. 4 Set in the game data storage area. Further, data information (light emission data) for displaying the number of rounds in the jackpot game is created, and the data information is set in the fourth game data storage area of the game RAM 84.

[Special Electric Accessory Processing (Big Hit Game)] As shown in FIG. 51, in the special electric accessory processing (S1307), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2201). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the jackpots (first jackpot 30 or second jackpot 35) have been opened in the jackpot game being executed.

If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2201), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is open (S2202). If it is not open (NO in S2202), it is time to open the big prize opening, that is, whether the opening time of the jackpot game has passed and the opening start time in the first round game has been reached, or It is determined whether or not the interval time (closing time) until the once closed large winning opening is opened again has passed and the opening start time has been reached (S2203).

If the determination result in step S2203 is NO, the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S2203 is YES, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game currently being executed is a jackpot game as a V-long jackpot (S2204). If it is not a V-long jackpot, the process proceeds to step S2207, but if it is a V-long jackpot, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the 16th round in which the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 (S2205). If it is not the time to start the 16th round (NO in S2205), proceed to step S2207 as it is. On the other hand, if it is the timing to start the 16th round (YES in S2205), the V validity period setting process (S2206) is performed.

In the V validity period setting process (S2206), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is enabled for a few seconds during the opening of the second large winning opening 35 and after the closing of the second large winning opening 35 in the 16th round. Judgment V Set to the valid period. In this embodiment, a period other than this (including when the jackpot game is not executed) is set as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid.

In step S2207, the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 37) according to the type of jackpot. The distribution member 71 always moves in a constant motion from the start of the round game (or big hit game).

In the following step S2208, the round designation command transmission determination process is performed. In the round designation command transmission determination process (S2208), it is determined whether or not the opening of the big winning opening in step S2207 is the first opening in one round game, and if so, the jackpot game being executed. A round designation command including information on the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 84.

In step S2202 of the special electric accessory processing (S1307), if the large winning opening is open (YES in S2202), it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied (S2209). In this embodiment, the closing condition is that the number of winnings in the large winning opening in the round game reaches the specified maximum number of winnings (8 per 1R in this embodiment), or the time to close the large winning opening is reached. Any of the above (that is, the predetermined opening time (see FIG. 37) has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the big winning opening is not satisfied (NO in S2209), the process is completed.

On the other hand, when the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied (YES in S2209), the big winning opening is closed (closed) (S2210). Then, when one round game is completed by closing step S2210 (YES in S2211), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2212), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0". (S2213). If it is not "0" (NO in S2013), the process is finished as it is to start the next round game.

On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S2213), the jackpot ending command is set (S2214) and the jackpot ending is started (S2215) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game. Then, the jackpot end flag is set (S2216) to end this process.

If the jackpot end flag is ON in step S2201 (YES in S2201), the final round has ended, so it is determined whether or not the jackpot ending time has passed (S2217), and the ending time has passed. If not (NO in S2217), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (YES in S2217), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2218), the jackpot flag is turned off (S2219), and the special operation status is set to "1" (S2220). After that, the game state setting process (S2221) is performed to finish this process.

In the game state setting process (S2221), it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned V flag is ON, and if the V flag is not ON, the time reduction flag is turned ON and the time reduction counter is set to "100". As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time is controlled to the low accuracy and high base state in which the number of time reductions is set to 100 times. On the other hand, if the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are turned ON, and "160" is set in the probability variation counter and the time reduction counter. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a high-accuracy high-base state in which the so-called number of STs is set to 160 times.

In this game state setting process (S2221), in order to change the game state, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for displaying the changed game state, and uses the data information. It is set in the fourth game data storage area of the game RAM 84. Further, in order to end the jackpot game, data information for erasing the display of the number of rounds is created, and the data information is set in the fourth game data storage area of the game RAM 84.

[Output processing] The game control microcomputer 81 executes an output processing (S107) after the above-mentioned special operation processing (S105) and specific area sensor detection processing (S106) (see FIG. 44). In the output process (S107), as shown in FIG. 52, first, whether or not the game machine frame 50 is open (the inner frame 52 is open with respect to the outer frame 51), that is, is there detection by the frame open detection switch 50a? Determine if not (S2301). If the game machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301), that is, if there is no detection by the frame opening detection switch 50a, the game display process described later is executed (S2303), and the process proceeds to step S2305. The game display process (S2303) is a process for displaying game information (big hit symbol, game state, etc.) related to the progress of the game on the game display 40.

On the other hand, if the game machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301), it is subsequently determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the customer waiting state (S2302). If the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the game display process is executed (S2303), and the process proceeds to step S2305. On the other hand, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), the output rate display process (specific display process) described later is executed (S2304), and the process proceeds to step S2305. The output rate display process (S2304) is a process for displaying the output rate on the output rate display 300. In step S2305, as another output setting process, commands and the like set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 84 of the main control board 80 are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like, and this process is performed. To finish.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the game machine frame 50 is closed, or if the special symbol variation display or the jackpot game is being executed, the game display process (S2303) is executed. On the other hand, if the game machine frame is open and the variation display of the special symbol and the jackpot game are not executed, the output rate display process (S2304) is executed. In other words, the display condition for displaying the output rate on the output rate display 300 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "display condition") is limited to the game machine frame 50 being open and waiting for customers. ing. The reason why the display conditions are restricted in this way is as follows.

First, as described above, the output rate indicator 300 is arranged on the main control board 80 so that the person who confirms the output rate can confirm the output rate as reliable information. Therefore, the output rate display 300 cannot be visually recognized unless the game machine frame 50 is opened. Therefore, it is preferable that the display condition is the opening of the game machine frame 50 so that the output rate display can be visually recognized. That is, according to the drive circuit 200 of the present embodiment (see FIG. 15), from the viewpoint of avoiding an increase in ICs as much as possible and preventing blinking in dynamic lighting control, the display and output on the game display 40 are designed. The display on the rate display 300 becomes alternative. Therefore, when the game machine frame 50 is open, it is preferable that the game is basically not performed by the player and the game information does not have to be displayed on the game display 40.

However, if the special symbol variation display is still executed immediately after the game machine frame 50 is opened, or if the game ball enters the starting ports 20 and 21 and the special symbol variation display is started. possible. In this case, the game information must be displayed on the game display 40. That is, it is necessary not to display the output rate on the output rate display 300. In this way, the display condition is limited to the state of waiting for customers in addition to the opening of the game machine frame 50. It should be noted that the payout rate is not shown to the player, but to the person who inspects whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been tampered with, and is basically shown only at the time of inspection. It is enough if it is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to display the output rate during the game, and limiting the display conditions as described above does not cause any problem.

[Game display process] In the game display process (S2303), as shown in FIG. 53, it is first determined whether or not the common flag is "1". The common flag is set to any value of "1" or "2" or "3" or "4", and is in any of the four light emitting regions 410 to 440 of the game display 40. It indicates whether to control the light emission.

If the common flag is "1" (YES in S2401), first, the data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2402). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched (set) to the "H" level (S2403) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the light emitting state in the fourth light emitting region 440 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [1000] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2404). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2405) (see FIG. 18). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the first light emitting region 410. Subsequently, the data information D [0 ... 7] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 based on the data information (light emitting data) stored in the first game data storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2406). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2407) (see FIG. 19). As a result, it is possible to make the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 emit light in a light emitting mode (for example, a jackpot symbol) to be displayed in the first light emitting region 410. Then, the common flag is switched to "2" (S2408), and this process is completed.

If the common flag is not "1" in step S2401, the process proceeds to step S2409 to determine whether or not the common flag is "2". If the common flag is "2" (YES in S2409), first, the data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2410). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2411) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the light emitting state in the first light emitting region 410 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0100] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2412). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2413) (see FIG. 20). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the second light emitting region 420. Subsequently, the data information D [0 ... 7] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 based on the data information (light emitting data) stored in the second game data storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2414). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2415) (see FIG. 21). As a result, it is possible to make the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 emit light in a light emitting mode (for example, a lost pattern) to be displayed in the second light emitting region 420. Then, the common flag is switched to "3" (S2416), and this processing is completed.

If the common flag is not "2" in step S2409, the process proceeds to step S2417 to determine whether or not the common flag is "3". If the common flag is "3" (YES in S2417), first, the data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2418). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2419) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the light emitting state in the second light emitting region 420 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0010] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2420). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2421) (see FIG. 22). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the third light emitting region 430. Subsequently, the data information D [0 ... 7] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 based on the data information (light emitting data) stored in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2422). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2423) (see FIG. 23). Thereby, it is possible to make the game light emitting units LA17 to LA24 emit light in the light emitting mode to be displayed in the third light emitting region 430. Then, the common flag is switched to "4" (S2424), and this process is completed.

If the common flag is not "3" in step S2417, the common flag is set to "4", and the process proceeds to step S2425. In step S2425, data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2426) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the light emitting state in the third light emitting region 430 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0001] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2427). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2428) (see FIG. 24). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the fourth light emitting region 440. Subsequently, the data information D [0 ... 7] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 based on the data information (light emitting data) stored in the fourth game data storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2429). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2430) (see FIG. 25). As a result, it is possible to make the game light emitting units LA25 to LA32 emit light in the light emitting mode to be displayed in the fourth light emitting region 440. Then, the common flag is switched to "1" (S2431) to end this process.

[Output rate display process] In the output rate display process (S2304), as shown in FIG. 54, it is first determined whether or not the common flag is "1" (S2501). Although the common flag was also used in the game display process (S2303) described above, it indicates in which of the four lighting areas 310 to 340 of the output rate display 300 the lighting control is performed.

If the common flag is "1" (YES in S2501), first, the data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2502). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2503) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the fourth lighting area 340 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [1000] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2504). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2505) (see FIG. 27). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the first lighting area 310. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the display flag is "1" (S2506). As described above, the display flag is switched to either "1" or "2" by operating the RAM clear switch 152 (see FIG. 45), and if it is "1", the display of the accessory ratio is indicated. If it is "2", it indicates the display of the continuous accessory ratio. If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2506), data for displaying the tens digit of the accessory ratio stored in the accessory ratio storage area of the special memory 89 from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Information D [0 ... 7] is output (S2507). On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2506), the tens digit of the continuous accessory ratio stored in the continuous accessory ratio storage area of the special memory 89 is displayed from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Data information D [0 ... 7] is output (S2508). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2509) (see FIG. 28). As a result, it is possible to light the output rate lighting units LB1 to LB8 in the lighting mode (for example, “6”) to be displayed in the first lighting area 310. Then, the common flag is switched to "2" (S2510) to end this process.

If the common flag is not "1" in step S2501, the process proceeds to step S2511 to determine whether or not the common flag is "2". If the common flag is "2" (YES in S2511), first, the data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2512). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2513) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the first lighting area 310 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0100] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2514). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2515) (see FIG. 29). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the second lighting area 320. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the display flag is "1" (S2516). If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2516), data for displaying the first digit of the accessory ratio stored in the accessory ratio storage area of the special memory 89 from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Information D [0 ... 7] is output (S2517). On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2516), the first digit of the continuous accessory ratio stored in the continuous accessory ratio storage area of the special memory 89 is displayed from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Data information D [0 ... 7] is output (S2518). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2519) (see FIG. 30). As a result, it is possible to light the output rate lighting units LB9 to LB16 in the lighting mode (for example, "0") to be displayed in the second lighting area 320. Then, the common flag is switched to "3" (S2520), and this process is completed.

If the common flag is not "2" in step S2511, the process proceeds to step S2521 as shown in FIG. 55, and it is determined whether or not the common flag is "3". If the common flag is "3" (YES in S2521), first, the data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2522). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2523) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the second lighting area 320 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0010] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2524). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2525) (see FIG. 31). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the third lighting area 330. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the display flag is "1" (S2526).

If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2526), the data information D [0 ... 7] for displaying "1" is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2527). That is, the data information D [0 ... 7] = [011000000] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2529), the output rate lighting units LB18 and LB19 of the third lighting area 330 are lit and "1" is displayed. In this way, in this embodiment, if "1" is displayed in the third lighting area 330, the two digits displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 are displayed to the person who confirms the output rate. Make them understand that the number (output rate) of is the accessory ratio.

On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2526), the data information D [0 ... 7] for displaying "2" is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2528). That is, the data information D [0 ... 7] = [11011010] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2529) (see FIG. 32), the output rate lighting units LB17, LB18, LB20, LB21, and LB23 of the third lighting area 330 are lit. "2" is displayed. In this way, in the present embodiment, if "2" is displayed in the third lighting area 330, the two digits displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 are displayed to the person who confirms the output rate. Make sure that the number (output rate) of is the continuous bonus ratio. In step S2530, the common flag is switched to "4" to end this process.

If the common flag is not "3" in step S2521, the common flag is "4" and the process proceeds to step S2531. In step S2531, data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2532) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the third lighting area 330 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0001] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2533). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2534) (see FIG. 33). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the fourth lighting area 340.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the actual total prize ball counter of the special memory 89 is "100" or more (S2535). That is, it is determined whether or not the total number of prize balls has reached "10000" since the power was turned on for the first time in the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is "100" or more (YES in S2535), the process proceeds to step S2536. On the other hand, if it is not "100" or more (NO in S2535), it is subsequently determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation count counter of the special memory 89 is "3000" or more (S2537). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations since the power is turned on for the first time in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has reached "3000" times. If it is "3000" or more (YES in S2537), the process proceeds to step S2536. In step S2536, the data information D [0 ... 7] for displaying "1" is output. That is, the data information D [0 ... 7] = D [01100000] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2539) (see FIG. 34), the output rate lighting units LB26 and LB27 in the fourth lighting area 340 are lit and "1" is displayed. To. In this way, in this embodiment, if "1" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340, the displayed output rate (role ratio or continuous accessory ratio) converges to some extent to the person who confirms the output rate. Make them understand that it is a valid value.

On the other hand, if the value of the actual total prize ball counter is less than "100" (NO in S2535) and the value of the fluctuation count counter is less than "3000" (NO in S2537), the process proceeds to step S2538. .. In step S2538, the data information D [0 ... 7] for displaying "0" is output. That is, the data information D [0 ... 7] = [11111100] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2539), the lighting units LB25, LB26, LB27, LB28, LB29, LB30 of the fourth lighting area 340 are lit and "0". Is displayed. In this way, in this embodiment, if "0" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340, the displayed output rate (role ratio or continuous accessory ratio) is still converged to the person who confirms the output rate. Make them understand that it is a reference value that may not have been done. In step S2540, the common flag is switched to "1" to end this process.

[Power Off Monitoring Process] The game control microcomputer 81 executes the power off monitoring process (S108) after the output process (S107) described above (see FIG. 44). In the power-off monitoring process (S108), as shown in FIG. 56, first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2901), and if there is no input (NO in S2901), the process is terminated. The power supply cutoff signal is a signal input by the game control microcomputer 81 when the voltage of the power supply being monitored starts to decrease due to the power failure. Specifically, the power supply board 150 monitors the generated 32V voltage, and when the voltage becomes 17V (predetermined voltage value) or less, a power supply cutoff signal is output to the game control microcomputer 81, and a predetermined power supply cutoff signal is output from that point. A reset signal is output after the lapse of time. The voltage to be monitored and the voltage value (predetermined voltage value) when the power supply cutoff signal is output can be changed as appropriate.

If there is a power off signal input in step S2901 (YES in S2901), the checksum of the game RAM 84 is calculated (S2902), and the calculated checksum is stored in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2903). .. Next, the checksum of the special memory 89 is calculated (S2904), and the calculated checksum is stored in the checksum storage area of the special memory 89 (see FIG. 11C) (S2905). Subsequently, the power off flag is turned ON (S2906), and access to the gaming RAM 84 and the special memory 89 is prohibited (S2907). This makes it impossible to write or read information from the gaming RAM 84 and the special memory 89. After that, loop processing is performed without returning to the main timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 44).

9. Operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 [Sub-control main process] Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 61. The counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM 94. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 57 from the ROM 93.

As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, it is determined whether or not the sub-side power off flag (flag that is turned on at the time of power failure) is ON and the contents of the RAM 94 are normal (S4001). If the determination result is NO, that is, if the sub-side power-off flag is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM 94 are abnormal even if the sub-side power-off flag is ON, the RAM 94 is initialized. Then (S4002) and proceed to step S4003.

On the other hand, if the judgment result is YES (YES in S4001), that is, if the sub-side power off flag is turned on due to the power failure but the contents of the RAM 94 are kept normal, then the RAM is cleared. Determine if a notification command has been received (S4011). If the RAM clear notification command is received (YES in S4011), the stored contents of the gaming RAM 84 of the main control board 80 have been cleared. Therefore, the stored contents of the RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 are cleared (S4002), and the process proceeds to step S4003. On the other hand, if the RAM clear notification command has not been received (NO in S4011), the process proceeds to step S4003 without clearing the stored contents of the RAM 94.

In step S4003, other initial settings are performed. In other initial settings, for example, the CPU 92 is set, and SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time) and the like are set. If the sub-side power off flag is ON, it is turned OFF.

In step S4004, interrupts are disabled. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The random numbers for determining the effect include a random number for determining the effect symbol for determining the effect symbol, a random number for determining the variable effect pattern for determining the variable effect pattern, and a random number for determining the advance notice effect for determining various advance notice effects. And so on. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Instead of adding the random numbers one by one at the time of updating, it may be added by two. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process (S4006), various commands stored in the output buffer in the RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100. Upon receiving the command, the image control board 100 executes various effects (variation effect, jackpot effect including opening effect, round effect, ending effect, etc.) using the image display device 7 according to the command. The sub-control board 90 outputs sound from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 as the image control board 100 executes various effects. Further, the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 are made to emit light via the sub drive board 107 and the relay board 108, and the board movable body 15 is driven. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently enables interrupts (S4007). After that, steps S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed.

[Reception interrupt processing] In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), when the strobe signal (STB signal) is turned ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91. And, it is a process that is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010). As shown in FIG. 41, in the reception interrupt process (S4008), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the reception buffer of the RAM 94 (S4101).

[1 ms timer interrupt process] The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 1 msec is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 59, in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, the input process (S4201) is performed. In the input process (S4201), switch data (edge data and level data) is created based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switch 63a (see FIG. 10) and the select button detection switch 64a (see FIG. 10).

Subsequently, the lamp data output process (S4202) is performed. In the lamp data output processing (S4202), in order to make the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 emit light at a timing suitable for the production, the lamp data created in the other processing (S4304) in the 10ms timer interrupt processing described later is sent to the sub drive board 107. Output. That is, the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 are made to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode according to the lamp data.

Next, the drive control process (S4203) is performed. In the drive control process (S4203), drive data (data for driving the panel movable body drive motor 15a) is created and output in order to drive the panel movable body 15 at a timing suitable for the effect. That is, the board movable body 15 is driven in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Then, the watchdog timer process (S4204) for resetting the watchdog timer is performed, and this process is completed.

[10 ms timer interrupt process] The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 60, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the received command analysis process described later is performed (S4301). Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed in which the switch data created by the 1 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM 94 as the switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4302). Subsequently, a switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition process (S4302) is performed (S4303).

After that, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66), and creates audio data (data for controlling the output of audio from the speaker 67) and audio. Other processing such as output to the control board 106 and updating of various effect determination random numbers is executed (S4304), and this processing is completed.

[Received Command Analysis Process] As shown in FIG. 61, in the received command analysis process (S4301), the effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401). If it is received, the variable effect start processing is performed (S4402). In the variation effect start processing (S4402), the variation start command is analyzed, and the variation effect pattern is selected based on the analysis result. In addition, an effect symbol as a stop symbol and a notice effect are also selected. Then, a variable effect start command for starting the variable effect with the selected effect content is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and if so, performs a variation effect end process (S4404). In the variation effect end process (S4404), the variation stop command is analyzed, and the variation effect end command for ending the variation effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 based on the analysis result.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and if so, performs an opening effect selection process (S4406). In the opening effect selection process (S4406), the opening command is analyzed, and the pattern (content) of the opening effect to be executed during the opening of the jackpot game is selected based on the analysis result. Then, an opening effect start command for starting the opening effect with the selected opening effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407), and if so, performs a round effect selection process (S4408). In the round effect selection process (S4408), the round designation command is analyzed, and the pattern (content) of the round effect to be executed during the round game of the jackpot game is selected based on the analysis result. Then, a round effect start command for starting the round effect with the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4409), and if so, performs an ending effect selection process (S4410). In the ending effect selection process (S4410), the ending command is analyzed, and the pattern (content) of the ending effect to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game is selected based on the analysis result. Then, an ending effect start command for starting the ending effect with the selected ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a special memory clear command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4411), and if so, performs a special memory clear notification process (S4412). In the special memory clear notification process (S4412), a special memory clear notification command for notifying that the stored contents of the special memory 89 have been erased is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94. As a result, when the special memory clear notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 62 (A). The clear image CL1 indicating the characters "The special memory has been cleared" is displayed. At this time, a special voice suggesting that the stored contents of the special memory 89 have been erased is output from the speaker 67. In this way, it is possible to easily recognize that the stored contents of the special memory 89 have been erased, that is, that the output rate has been initialized. The notification mode indicating that the stored contents of the special memory 89 have been erased can be changed as appropriate. For example, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), a clear image CL2 indicating the characters “Initialized output rate” is displayed on the display screen 7a, or a predetermined lamp (frame lamp 66 or board lamp 5) is displayed. It may be made to emit light in a special light emitting mode.

In step S4413, as another process, a process based on a received command other than the above command (for example, a process of performing a V-pass notification based on a V-pass command indicating passage to the specific area 39) is performed. Then, the received command analysis process (S4301) is completed.

10. Effect of the present embodiment As described in detail above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment (first form), the output rate display 300 is displayed by the control processing of the main control board 80 as shown in FIG. It is possible to display the output rate. That is, the output rate is displayed by the main control board 80 that performs the main game control, and the output rate is not displayed by, for example, the sub control board 90. Therefore, it is possible for the person who confirms (inspects) the output rate to grasp the output rate as reliable information. As a result, it is possible to correctly determine whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been tampered with, or whether the output rate is abnormal due to a defect or failure.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display on the game display 40 and the display on the output rate display 300 are selectively performed. This makes it possible to avoid complicated display control by the game control microcomputer 81. Then, the display condition for displaying the output rate on the output rate display 300 is that the game machine frame 50 is open and the customer is waiting. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the starting ports 20 and 21 and the variable display of the special symbol is started when the game machine frame 50 is open, the display condition is not satisfied. Therefore, in the above case, the game information (special symbol or the like) related to the progress of the game is displayed on the game display 40 to prevent the function of displaying the game information from being lost even though the game is in progress. It is possible.

11. Modification example The modification example will be described below. In the description of the modified example, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification example of the first form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 as a modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 73. In the first embodiment, the output rate can be displayed on the output rate display 300. On the other hand, in the modified example of the first form, the base can be displayed on the base display. The base (specific ratio value) is the ratio of the total number of prize balls acquired by the player to the number of shot balls (total number of shot balls, specific number of game balls), which is the number of game balls fired by the player. is there. The base display for displaying the base is composed of four 7-segment displays, and has exactly the same hardware configuration as the output rate display 300 (see FIG. 8) described above. Therefore, it will be referred to as "base display (specific display) 300" below. The number of launched balls is a value that becomes the denominator before the base is calculated (denominator measurement value), and the total number of prize balls is a value that becomes the numerator before the base is calculated (numerator measurement value).

In order to calculate the base, it is necessary to count the number of launched balls. Here, in the present embodiment, all the entry ports (first start opening 20, second start opening 21, first big winning opening 30, second big winning opening 35, normal winning opening 27) provided in the game area 3 , The number of game balls that have entered the out port 16) is counted. The number of game balls counted in this way is regarded as the number of launch balls. However, in the first embodiment, the sensor for detecting the game ball that has entered the out port 16 is not arranged.

Therefore, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 63, the out port sensor 16a is arranged in the out port discharge path HK extending from the out port 16 to the outside of the game area 3. The out-port sensor 16a detects a game ball that has entered the out-port 16. The game ball that has entered the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, the first large winning opening 30, the second large winning opening 35, or the normal winning opening 27 does not pass through the out opening sensor 16a. It is designed to be discharged to the outside of the game area 3. That is, the out-port sensor 16a of this modified example detects a game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning openings. As shown in FIG. 64, the main control board 80 is connected to the out port sensor 16a via the relay board 88. Therefore, the detection signal by the out-port sensor 16a is input to the game control microcomputer 81.

Here, in order to count the number of launched balls, a method of providing a sensor for detecting the game balls launched toward the game area 3 in the vicinity of the rail member 4 (see FIG. 1) can be considered. However, in this method, after the sensor detects the fired game ball, there is a possibility that the game ball that has returned due to weak momentum may be detected again, and it may not be possible to accurately count the number of fired balls. Therefore, in this modified example, the number of launched balls can be counted as accurately as possible by counting all the game balls discharged to the outside of the game area 3.

By the way, in pachinko gaming machines, a test firing test of the base (ball ejection rate) is performed before installing the hall. In the 1-hour test firing test, it is tested that the base is not more than 3 (300%). Further, in the 10-hour test firing test, it is inspected that the base is more than 0.5 (50%) and not more than 2 (200%). However, in the past, it was not possible to completely deny the possibility that the base was out of the normal range due to unauthorized modification after inspection, failure or malfunction. Therefore, in this modification, the base can be displayed on the base display 300.

In this modification, there are three types of bases. In the normal game state (non-time saving state), the base in the time saving state (high probability state and time saving state, or the low probability state and time saving state), and the jackpot game state (from the start to the end of the jackpot game). Is the base of. The base in the normal game state is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of shot balls counted only in the normal game state. The base in the time-saving state is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of shot balls counted only in the time-saving state. The base in the jackpot game state is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of launch balls counted only in the jackpot game state. By confirming each base divided for each gaming state in this way, it is possible to more accurately determine the abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as compared with the case where only the bases for all the gaming states can be confirmed.

Next, the display on the base display 300 will be described. In the first lighting area 310, ten when displaying the base in the normal gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "normal base") or the base in the time saving state (hereinafter referred to as "time saving base") as a percentage (percentage). Display the digit of the place. However, although it is almost impossible for the normal base and the time saving base to exceed 1 (100%), the base in the jackpot game state (hereinafter referred to as "big hit base (ball output rate)") will exceed almost 1. Become. Therefore, in the first lighting area 310, the hundreds place when the jackpot base is displayed as a percentage is displayed.

In the second lighting area 320, the ones digit is displayed when the normal base or the time saving base is displayed as a percentage, whereas the tens digit when the jackpot base is displayed as a percentage is displayed. In this modified example, the base display 300 does not display the ones place when the jackpot base is displayed as a percentage. This is because it is almost meaningless to check up to the third significant digit of the jackpot base.

In the third lighting area 330, it is indicated whether the base displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 is a normal base, a time saving base, or a jackpot base. In this modification, when the normal base is displayed, "1" is displayed in the third lighting area 330. When the time saving base is displayed, "2" is displayed in the third lighting area 330. When the jackpot base is displayed, "3" is displayed in the third lighting area 330.

In the fourth lighting area 340, it is indicated whether the base displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 is an effective value or a reference value. The meaning of the valid value or the reference value is to indicate whether or not the base is a value that has converged to some extent, as in the meaning of the first form. In this modification, the total number of balls launched from the time the power is turned on to the present time (the total number of balls launched in the normal game state, the number of balls launched in the time saving state, and the number of balls launched in the jackpot game state) is "100000". Either the first condition that the number of occurrences is "3000" or more, or the second condition that the number of fluctuations for which the special symbol variation display has been executed since the power was turned on is "3000" (predetermined rotation speed) or more. If the above conditions are satisfied, the base is regarded as a converged value (effective value) to some extent. On the contrary, if neither the first condition nor the second condition described above is satisfied, the base is regarded as a value (reference value) that has not converged to some extent.

As shown in FIG. 65 (C), the special memory 89 of the modified example is a dedicated memory for storing processing information for calculating the base. Specifically, the special memory 89 includes a normal 100-ball counter, a normal launch ball counter, a normal total prize ball counter, a normal base storage area, a time-saving 100 ball counter, a time-saving launch ball counter, and a time-saving total prize ball number. A counter, a time-saving base storage area, a counter for 100 jackpot balls, a jackpot launch ball number counter, a jackpot total prize ball count counter, a jackpot base storage area, a fluctuation number counter, and a checksum storage area are provided. The special memory 89 of the modified example is a volatile storage means (DRAM) that cannot retain the stored contents when the power is not supplied, like the special memory 89 of the first embodiment. However, the stored contents of the special memory 89 are not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on, as in the first mode.

The normal 100-ball counter (first counter) counts the number of fired balls fired by the player in the normal game state one by one, and is reset to a value of "0" when 100 balls are counted. It has become. The normal launch ball number counter (second counter) normally counts one when 100 balls are counted by the 100 ball counter. These normal 100-ball counter and normal-launched ball number counter measure the number of fired balls in the normal game state from the time when the power is turned on to the present time as one in 100-ball units (measurement means for 100 balls). Is. In this way, by calculating the normal base using the normal 100-ball counter and the normal launch ball number counter, it is possible to simplify the soft processing at the time of division as described in the first embodiment. At the same time, it is possible to omit the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. The normal total prize ball counter counts the total number of prize balls in the normal gaming state from the time the power is turned on to the present time. The normal base storage area stores the calculated normal base.

The time-saving 100-ball counter (first counter) counts the number of shot balls fired by the player in the time-saving state one by one, and when 100 balls are counted, the value is reset to "0". ing. The time-saving launch ball number counter (second counter) counts one when 100 balls are counted by the time-saving 100 ball counter. These time-saving 100-ball counters and time-saving launch ball counters measure the number of fired balls in the time-saving state from the time the power is turned on to the present time as one in units of 100 balls (measurement means for 100 balls). is there. By calculating the time-saving base using the time-saving 100-ball counter and the time-saving launch ball number counter in this way, it is possible to simplify the soft processing at the time of division as described in the first embodiment. At the same time, it is possible to omit the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. The time-saving total prize ball counter counts the total number of prize balls in the time-saving state from the time the power is turned on to the present time. The time saving base storage area stores the calculated time saving base.

The jackpot 100-ball counter (first counter) counts the number of fired balls fired by the player in the jackpot game state one by one, and is reset to a value of "0" when 100 balls are counted. It has become. The jackpot launch ball number counter (second counter) counts one when 100 balls are counted by the jackpot 100 ball counter. These jackpot 100-ball counters and jackpot launch ball counters measure the number of launch balls in the jackpot game state from the time the power is turned on to the present time as one in units of 100 balls (measurement means for 100 balls). Is. By calculating the jackpot base using the jackpot 100 ball counter and the jackpot launch ball number counter in this way, it is possible to simplify the soft processing at the time of division as described in the first embodiment. At the same time, it is possible to omit the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. The jackpot total prize ball counter counts the total number of prize balls in the jackpot game state from the time the power is turned on to the present time. The jackpot base storage area stores the calculated jackpot base. Since the fluctuation count counter and the checksum storage area are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Input Process] In the input process (S101) of the modified example shown in FIG. 66, step S150 is provided in place of step S111 for the input process (S101) of the first form shown in FIG. 45, and is replaced with step S117. Step S152 is provided, and steps S153 to S157 are provided in place of steps S119 to S121. As shown in FIG. 66, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals from each sensor in step S110, and then determines whether or not the ball entry detection signal is in step S150. That is, the detection signal by the first start port sensor 20a, the detection signal by the second start port sensor 21a, the detection signal by the first big winning opening sensor 30a, the detection signal by the second big winning opening sensor 35a, and the normal winning opening sensor 27a. It is determined whether or not it is a detection signal or a detection signal by the out port sensor 16a. If it is a ball entry detection signal (YES in S150), after steps S112 and S113, the counter addition process described later is executed (S151). However, in this modification, when the signal is detected by the out-port sensor 16a, the prize ball command is not set in step S113. Then, if the game machine frame 50 is open (YES in S115) and waiting for customers (YES in S116), the base calculation process described later is executed (S152).

If it is determined in step S118 that the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S153. In step S153, it is determined whether or not the display flag at the present time is "1". The display flag of the modified example indicates a value of either "1", "2", or "3". If the display flag is "1" (YES in S153), the display flag is switched to "2" (S154), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not "1" (NO in S153), it is subsequently determined whether or not the display flag is "2" (S155). If it is "2" (YES in S155), the display flag is switched to "3" (S156), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not "2" (NO in S155), it means "3", the display flag is switched to "1" (S157), and this process ends.

In this modification, when displaying the base as described later, if the display flag is "1", the normal base is displayed, and if the display flag is "2", the time saving base is displayed and displayed. If the flag is "3", the jackpot base is displayed. Therefore, every time the person who confirms the base operates the RAM clear switch 152, it is possible to switch between the display of the normal base, the display of the time saving base, and the display of the jackpot base.

[Counter addition process] As shown in FIG. 67, in the counter addition process (S151), first, it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal game state (normal probability state and non-time saving state) (S160). That is, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is OFF and the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is OFF. In the normal game state (YES in S160), the value of the normal 100-ball counter is added by "1" (S161). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for 100 balls is "100" or more (S162). If it is less than "100" (NO in S162), the process proceeds to step S165. On the other hand, if it is "100" or more (YES in S162), the value of the normal launch ball counter is added by "1" (S163), and the value of the normal 100 ball counter is subtracted by "100" (S). S164), proceed to step S165. In this way, it is possible to measure the number of shot balls in the normal gaming state as one in units of 100 balls.

In step S165, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the out port 16. That is, it is determined whether or not the ball entry detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 is a detection signal by the out port sensor 16a. If the ball enters the out port 16 (YES in S165), this process is completed. On the other hand, if it is not a ball entering the out opening (NO in S165), the winning opening (first starting opening 20, second starting opening 21, first large winning opening 30, second large winning opening 35, normal winning opening 27) ) Will be a prize. In this case, the value of the normal total prize ball counter is added based on the type of the ball entry detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 and the prize ball counter addition table shown in FIG. 65 (A). (S166), this process is completed. For example, in the case of winning a prize in the normal winning opening 27 in the normal game state, the value of the normal total prize ball counter is added by "8".

If it is determined in step S160 that the game is not in the normal gaming state, it is subsequently determined whether or not it is in the time saving state (high probability probability state and time saving state, or normal probability state and time saving state) (S167). That is, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If it is in the time saving state (YES in S167), the value of the time saving 100 ball counter is added by "1" (S168). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time-saving 100-ball counter is "100" or more (S169). If it is less than "100" (NO in S169), the process proceeds to step S172. On the other hand, if it is "100" or more (YES in S169), the value of the time-saving launch ball counter is added by "1" (S170), and the value of the time-saving 100 ball counter is subtracted by "100" (S). S171), proceed to step S172. In this way, it is possible to measure the number of launched balls in a time-saving state as one in units of 100 balls.

In step S172, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the out port 16. That is, it is determined whether or not the ball entry detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 is a detection signal by the out port sensor 16a. If the ball enters the out port 16 (YES in S172), this process is completed. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the out port (NO in S172), it is based on the type of the ball entry detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 and the prize ball counter addition table shown in FIG. 65 (A). , Add the value of the time saving total prize ball counter (S173), and finish this process. For example, in the case of winning a prize in the normal winning opening 27 in the time saving state, the value of the time saving total prize ball counter is added by "8".

If it is determined in step S167 that the time is not shortened, it means that the game is in the jackpot game state, and the process proceeds to step S174. In step S174, the value of the jackpot 100 ball counter is added by "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot 100-ball counter is "100" or more (S175). If it is less than "100" (NO in S175), the process proceeds to step S178. On the other hand, if it is "100" or more (YES in S175), the value of the jackpot launch ball counter is added by "1" (S176), and the value of the jackpot 100 ball counter is subtracted by "100" (S176). S177), proceed to step S178. In this way, it is possible to measure the number of shot balls in the jackpot game state as one in units of 100 balls.

In step S178, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the out port 16. That is, it is determined whether or not the ball entry detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 is a detection signal by the out port sensor 16a. If the ball enters the out port 16 (YES in S178), this process is completed. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the out port (NO in S178), it is based on the type of the ball entry detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 and the prize ball counter addition table shown in FIG. 65 (A). , Add the value of the jackpot total prize ball counter (S179), and finish this process. For example, in the case of winning a prize in the first big prize opening 30 in the big hit game state, the value of the big hit total prize ball counter is added by "15".

[Base arithmetic processing] As shown in FIG. 68, in the base arithmetic processing (S152, specific arithmetic processing), first, it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (normal probability state and non-time saving state) (S180). If it is in the normal game state (YES in S180), it is determined whether or not the value of the normal launch ball counter is "1" or more (S181). If it is "1" or more (YES in S181), the normal base arithmetic processing is executed (S182). Specifically, the value of the normal total prize ball counter is divided by the value of the normal launch ball counter. As a result, it is possible to easily calculate the normal base as the value of the percentage without performing the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. In the calculated normal base, the value of the first decimal place is rounded off. Then, the value of the normal base is stored in the normal base storage area (see FIG. 65C) of the special memory 89 (S183), and this processing is completed. On the other hand, if the value of the normal launch ball counter is not "1" or more in step S181, it is "0", and the normal base cannot be calculated, so this process ends.

Further, if it is determined in step S180 that the game is not in the normal gaming state, it is subsequently determined whether or not it is in the time saving state (high probability probability state and time saving state, or normal probability state and time saving state) (S184). If it is in the time saving state (YES in S184), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving firing ball counter is "1" or more (S185). If it is "1" or more (YES in S185), the time saving base calculation process is executed (S186). Specifically, the value of the time-saving total prize ball counter is divided by the value of the time-saving launch ball counter. This makes it possible to easily calculate the time saving base as the value of the percentage without performing the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. In the calculated time saving base, the value of the first decimal place is rounded off. Then, the time-saving base value is stored in the time-saving base storage area (see FIG. 65C) of the special memory 89 (S187), and this processing is completed. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving launch ball counter is not "1" or more in step S185, it is "0", and the time-saving base cannot be calculated, so that this process ends.

If it is determined in step S184 that the time is not shortened, it means that the game is in the jackpot game state, and the process proceeds to step S188. In step S188, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot launch ball counter is "1" or more (S188). If it is "1" or more (YES in S188), the jackpot base calculation process is executed (S189). Specifically, the value of the jackpot total prize ball counter is divided by the value of the jackpot launch ball counter. As a result, it is possible to easily calculate the jackpot base as the value of the percentage without performing the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. In the calculated time saving base, the ones digit value is rounded off. Then, the jackpot base value is stored in the jackpot base storage area (see FIG. 65 (C)) of the special memory 89 (S190), and this process is completed. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot launch ball counter is not "1" or more in step S188, it is "0", and the jackpot base cannot be calculated, so this process ends.

[Output Process] In the output process (S107) of the modified example shown in FIG. 69, step S2340 is provided in place of step S2304 for the output process (S107) of the first form shown in FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 69, in the game control microcomputer 81, if the game machine frame is open (YES in S2301) and waiting for customers (YES in S2302), the base display process (specific display process) described later ) Is executed (S2340). The base display process is a process for displaying the base on the base display 300.

[Base display process] In the base display process (S2340), as shown in FIG. 70, it is first determined whether or not the common flag is "1" (S2601). The common flag indicates in which of the four lighting areas 310 to 340 of the base display 300 the lighting control is performed.

If the common flag is "1" (YES in S2601), first, the data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2602). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2603) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the fourth lighting area 340 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [1000] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2604). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2605). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the first lighting area 310. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the display flag is "1" (S2606). As described above, the display flag is switched to either "1", "2", or "3" by operating the RAM clear switch 152 (see FIG. 66), and if it is "1", the normal base display is displayed. If it is "2", it indicates a time saving-based display, and if it is "3", it indicates a jackpot-based display.

If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2606), the data information D for displaying the tens digit of the normal base stored in the normal base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Output [0 ... 7] (S2607). On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2606), then it is determined whether or not the display flag is "2" (S2608). If the display flag is "2" (YES in S2608), the data information D for displaying the tens digit of the time saving base stored in the time saving base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Output [0 ... 7] (S2609). On the other hand, if the display flag is not "2" (NO in S2608), it means "3", and it is stored in the jackpot base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. The data information D [0 ... 7] for displaying the hundreds digit based on the jackpot is output (S2610). After step S2607 or S2609 or S2610, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2511). As a result, it is possible to light in the lighting mode to be displayed in the first lighting area 310. Then, the common flag is switched to "2" (S2612), and this process is completed.

If the common flag is not "1" in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2621 to determine whether or not the common flag is "2", as shown in FIG. 71. If the common flag is "2" (YES in S2621), first, the data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2622). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2623) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the first lighting area 310 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0100] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2624). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2625). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the second lighting area 320.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the display flag is "1" (S2626). If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2626), the data information D for displaying the first digit of the normal base stored in the normal base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Output [0 ... 7] (S2627). On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2626), then it is determined whether or not the display flag is "2" (S2628). If the display flag is "2" (YES in S2628), the data information D for displaying the first digit of the time saving base stored in the time saving base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Output [0 ... 7] (S2629). On the other hand, if the display flag is not "2" (NO in S2628), it means "3", and it is stored in the jackpot base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. The data information D [0 ... 7] for displaying the tens digit of the jackpot base is output (S2630). After step S2627 or S2629 or S2630, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2531). As a result, it is possible to light in the lighting mode to be displayed in the second lighting area 320. Then, the common flag is switched to "3" (S2632), and this process is completed.

If the common flag is not "2" in step S2621, the process proceeds to step S2641 to determine whether or not the common flag is "3", as shown in FIG. 72. If the common flag is "3" (YES in S2641), first, the data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2642). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2643) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the second lighting area 320 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0010] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2644). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2645). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the third lighting area 330.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the display flag is "1" (S2646). If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2646), the data information D [0 ... 7] for displaying "1" is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2647). That is, the data information D [0 ... 7] = [011000000] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2651), "1" is displayed in the third lighting area 330. In this way, in this embodiment, if "1" is displayed in the third lighting area 330, the two digits displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 are displayed to the person who confirms the base. Make them understand that the numbers (base) are usually based.

On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2646), it is subsequently determined whether or not the display flag is "2" (S2648). If the display flag is "2" (YES in S2648), the data information D [0 ... 7] for displaying "2" is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2549). That is, the data information D [0 ... 7] = [11011010] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2651), "2" is displayed in the third lighting area 330. In this way, in the present embodiment, if "2" is displayed in the third lighting area 330, the two digits displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 are displayed to the person checking the base. Make them understand that the numbers (base) are based on time saving.

On the other hand, in step S2648, if the display flag is not "2", it is "3". In this case, the data information D [0 ... 7] for displaying "3" is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2650). That is, the data information D [0 ... 7] = [11110010] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2651), "3" is displayed in the third lighting area 330. In this way, in this embodiment, if "3" is displayed in the third lighting area 330, the two digits displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 are displayed to the person who confirms the base. Make them understand that the numbers (base) are jackpot base. After step S2651, the common flag is switched to "4" (S2652) to end this process.

If the common flag is not "3" in step S2641, the common flag is "4", and the process proceeds to step S2661 as shown in FIG. 73. In step S2661, data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2662) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the third lighting area 330 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0001] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2663). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2664). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the fourth lighting area 340.

Next, the total number of launched balls (the total number of launched balls in the normal game state, the number of launched balls in the time saving state, and the number of launched balls in the jackpot game state) from the power-on to the present time is "100000" Determine if it is more than one. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the normal launch ball counter, the value of the time-saving launch ball counter, and the value of the jackpot launch ball counter is "1000" or more. If the total number of shots is "100,000" or more (YES in S2665), the process proceeds to step S2666. On the other hand, if it is not "100,000" or more (NO in S2665), it is subsequently determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation count counter of the special memory 89 is "3000" or more (S2667). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations since the power is turned on for the first time in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has reached "3000" times. If it is "3000" or more (YES in S2667), the process proceeds to step S2666. In step S2666, the data information D [0 ... 7] for displaying "1" is output. That is, the data information D [0 ... 7] = D [01100000] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2669), "1" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340. In this way, in this embodiment, if "1" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340, it is effective for the person who confirms the base that the displayed base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base) has converged to some extent. Make them understand that it is a value.

On the other hand, if the total number of launched balls is less than "100000" (NO in S2665) and the value of the fluctuation count counter is less than "3000" (NO in S2667), the process proceeds to step S2668. In step S2668, the data information D [0 ... 7] for displaying "0" is output. That is, the data information D [0 ... 7] = [11111100] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2669), "0" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340. In this way, in this embodiment, if "0" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340, the displayed base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base) is still converged to the person who confirms the base. Make them understand that it is a reference value that may not be available. After step S2669, the common flag is switched to "1" (S2670) to end this process.

As described above, according to the modified example of the first form, it is possible to confirm the base on the base display 300. In particular, it is possible to check the bases for each gaming state, such as the normal base (base in the normal gaming state), the time saving base (base in the time saving state), and the jackpot base (base in the jackpot gaming state). Therefore, it is possible to correctly determine the abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the base. If it is a normal base, for example, if it is in the range of 30% to 39%, it may be judged as within the normal range, and if it is a time saving base, for example, if it is in the range of 84% to 99%, it may be judged as within the normal range. Well, if it is a jackpot base, for example, if it is in the range of 600% to 800%, it may be judged as being within the normal range. Since the action and effect of the other modified examples are only changed based on the output rate with respect to the action and effect of the first form described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first mode described above, when the stored contents of the special memory 89 are erased, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), a clear image showing the characters "Cleared the special memory" on the display screen 7a. CL1 was displayed. On the other hand, in the modified example of the first form, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), the clear image CL3 indicating the characters "the base has been initialized" is displayed on the display screen 7a. good. At this time, a special sound suggesting that the base has been initialized may be output from the speaker 67. Alternatively, a predetermined lamp (frame lamp 66 or board lamp 5) may be made to emit light in a special light emitting mode.

<Second form>
The second form of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. The special memory 89 of the first form was a volatile storage means (DRAM). On the other hand, in the second form, the special memory 89A is a non-volatile storage means (EEPROM). The special memory 89A may be a non-volatile storage means other than EEPROM, and may be, for example, a flash memory. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 74 (B), the special memory 89A of the second form includes a storage area for 100 balls, an actual total prize ball number storage area, a prize ball number storage area, and a continuous prize ball. A number storage area and a variable number storage area are provided. The 100-ball storage area stores the value of the 100-ball counter that has been measured up to the time of power failure. The actual total prize ball number storage area stores the value of the actual total prize ball number counter measured by the time of power failure. The bonus ball number storage area stores the value of the bonus ball number counter measured by the time of power failure. The continuous prize ball number storage area stores the value of the continuous prize ball number counter measured up to the time of power failure. The fluctuation number storage area stores the value of the fluctuation number counter measured up to the time of power failure. The reason why each of these values (hereinafter referred to as "measured value for displaying the output rate") is stored in the special memory 89A is as follows.

As described above, the backup power supply can be supplied from the backup power supply circuit 151 to the special memory 89 (volatile storage means) of the first form, so that the special memory 89 can be used if the power is cut off for several days. The stored stored contents can be retained. However, it is conceivable that even the backup power supply cannot supply the special memory 89 due to disconnection or poor contact, and the stored contents of the special memory 89 are erased. Further, by intentionally pulling out the power plug 160 (see FIG. 7) and causing a power failure for several days, a situation may occur in which the stored contents of the special memory 89 are erased.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, in order to deal with the above problem, a special memory (nonvolatile memory) 89A which is a non-volatile storage means is provided, and the measured value for output rate display is stored in the special memory 89A at the time of power failure. I have to. As a result, even if the backup power supply is not supplied, it is possible to prevent the stored contents (measured value for displaying the output rate) of the special memory 89A from being erased. As a result, when the power is restored, it is possible to restart the measurement from the measured value for displaying the output rate stored immediately before the power failure occurs.

Here, a method of directly storing (storing) the measured value for displaying the output rate in the special memory 89A can be considered. However, in the case of this method, since the special memory 89A, which is a non-volatile storage means, is frequently accessed, the special memory 89A deteriorates quickly. That is, the non-volatile storage means cannot cope with high-frequency reading and writing like the volatile storage means.

Therefore, in the second mode, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), a game RAM (volatile memory) 84A, which is a volatile storage means, has a counter for 100 balls, an actual total prize ball counter, and a bonus ball number. A counter, a continuous bonus ball number counter, a fluctuation count counter, a bonus ratio storage area, and a continuous bonus ratio storage area are provided. As a result, in the normal time when no power interruption occurs (when the monitored voltage is larger than 17V), even if the measured value for output rate display is measured, the gaming RAM 84A is accessed, which is special. It does not access memory 89A. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the frequency of use (deterioration) of the special memory 89A.

Then, only when the power is cut off, the measured values for displaying the output rate measured so far are transferred (copied) to the special memory 89A. That is, the value of the 100-ball counter of the game RAM 84A, the value of the actual total prize ball counter, the value of the prize ball number counter, the value of the continuous prize ball counter, and the value of the fluctuation count counter. Are stored in the 100-ball storage area, the actual total prize ball number storage area, the bonus ball number storage area, the continuous prize ball number storage area, and the variable number-of-ball storage area of the special memory 89A, respectively. This makes it possible to avoid erasing the measured value for displaying the output rate even if an abnormal situation occurs such as disconnection, poor contact, or intentional disconnection for several days.

If all the stored contents of the game RAM 84A are cleared when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) thereafter, the output rate display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A is transferred (copied) to the game RAM 84A. It has become. That is, even if the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on, it is possible to restart the measurement from the output rate display measurement value stored at the time of power failure. On the other hand, if the stored contents of the game RAM 84A are not cleared when the power is turned on, the output rate display measurement value (value of the counter for 100 balls, the value of the actual total number of prize balls counter, the accessory) stored in the game RAM 84A. The value of the prize ball count counter, the value of the continuous bonus ball count counter, the value of the fluctuation number counter) and the measured value for output rate display stored in the special memory 89A (stored in the storage area for 100 balls). The value, the value stored in the bonus ball number storage area, the value stored in the continuous bonus ball number storage area, and the value stored in the fluctuation number storage area) are collated.

If the above-mentioned collation results match, it is determined that the output rate display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is normal, and the measurement is restarted from the output rate display measurement value. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned collation results do not match, it is determined that the measured value for displaying the output rate stored in the gaming RAM 84A is abnormal, and the output rate displayed stored in the special memory 89A. The measured value is transferred (copied) to the gaming RAM 84A. As a result, it is possible to restart the measurement from the output rate display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A, which is more likely to be normal. As described above, when the power is turned on, it is possible to restart the measurement while checking whether or not the output rate display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is normal.

[Power-on processing] In the power-on processing (S001) of the second form shown in FIG. 75, step S026, instead of steps S021 to S024 of the power-on processing (S001) of the first form shown in FIG. 43, S027 is provided. As shown in FIG. 75, when the game control microcomputer 81 clears all the information stored in the game RAM 84A in step S018, the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S026 through steps S019 and S020. In step S026, the measured value for displaying the output rate stored in the special memory 89A is transferred (copied) to the gaming RAM 84A, and the process proceeds to step S025. As a result, even if the stored contents of the game RAM 84A are erased when the power is turned on, the measurement can be restarted from the output rate display measurement value transferred to the special memory 89A at the time of power failure. Therefore, it is possible to display the output rate as a converged value.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S015 that the checksum values of the gaming RAM 84A match, the process proceeds to step S016 and S017, and then proceeds to step S027. In step S027, the output rate display measured value stored in the game RAM 84A is collated with the output rate display measured value stored in the special memory 89A. If the values of each output rate display measurement value match (YES in S027), it is determined that the output rate display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is normal, and the process does not proceed to step S026. Proceed to step S025. On the other hand, if even one of the measured values for displaying the output rate does not match (NO in S027), it is determined that the measured value for displaying the output rate stored in the game RAM 84A is abnormal. , The measured value for displaying the output rate stored in the special memory 89A is transferred to the gaming RAM 84A (S026). As described above, it is possible to decide whether or not to use the output rate display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A by the double check of the checksum verification of the game RAM 84A and the output rate display measurement value verification. Is.

[Prize ball counter addition process] In the prize ball counter addition process (S114) of the second form shown in FIG. 76, steps S201 to S204 of the prize ball counter addition process (S114) of the first form shown in FIG. 46, Steps S210 to S213, S215, S216, S218 are provided in place of S206, S207, S209. Steps S201 to S204, S206, S207, and S209 of the first form are processes related to each counter (see FIG. 11C) provided in the special memory 89, whereas steps S210 to S213, of the second form. S215, S216, and S218 are processes related to each counter (see FIG. 74 (A)) provided in the gaming RAM 84A. Since the only changes to the prize ball counter addition process (S114) of the first embodiment are the above points, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[Power Off Monitoring Process] In the second form of power off monitoring process (S108) shown in FIG. 77, step S2908 is performed instead of steps S2904 and S2905 of the first form of power off monitoring process (S108) shown in FIG. 56. It is provided. As shown in FIG. 77, if the game control microcomputer 81 receives a power cutoff signal input in step S2901 (YES in S2901), the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S2908 through steps S2902 and S2903. In step S2908, the output rate display measurement values measured by each counter provided in the game RAM 84A up to the time of power failure are transferred to each storage area (see FIG. 74 (B)) provided in the special memory 89A (copy). ). In this way, the measured value for displaying the output rate is held in the special memory 89A at the time of power failure.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second form, by storing the measured value for output rate display in the special memory 89A which is a non-volatile storage means at the time of power failure, the backup power supply will not be supplied by any chance. However, it is possible to avoid erasing the measured value for displaying the output rate. Then, when the power is turned on after that, it is possible to transfer the measured value for displaying the output rate stored in the special memory 89A at the time of the previous power failure to the game RAM 84A which is a volatile storage means. As a result, it is possible to restart the measurement from the same value as the output rate display measurement value stored at the time of power failure.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second form, in the normal time when the power failure does not occur, the measured value for displaying the output rate is stored in the game RAM 84A which is a volatile storage means, and the power is cut. Only occasionally, the measured value for displaying the output rate is stored (transferred) in the special memory 89A, which is a non-volatile storage means. Therefore, since the special memory 89A is not accessed frequently, the output rate is displayed in an abnormal situation such as disconnection, poor contact, or intentional power interruption for several days while suppressing the frequency of use (deterioration) of the special memory 89A. It is possible to avoid erasing the measured value. Since the other actions and effects of the second form are substantially the same as the above-mentioned actions and effects of the first form, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification example of the second form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 as a modified example of the second form will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. In the second mode, each value (measured value for displaying the output rate) measured for calculating the output rate at the time of power failure is stored in the special memory 89A which is a non-volatile storage means. On the other hand, in the modified example of the second form, each value (measured value for displaying the base) measured for calculating the base is stored in the special memory 89A which is a non-volatile storage means at the time of power failure. It is designed to let you.

As shown in FIG. 78 (B), the special memory 89A of the modified example of the second form includes a storage area for a normal 100 balls, a storage area for the number of normally launched balls, a storage area for the number of normal total prize balls, and a time saving of 100. Ball storage area, time-saving launch ball number storage area, time-saving total prize ball number storage area, jackpot 100 ball storage area, jackpot launch ball number storage area, jackpot total prize ball number storage area, and number of fluctuations A storage area is provided.

The normal 100-ball storage area stores the value of the normal 100-ball counter that has been measured by the time of power failure. The normal launch ball number storage area stores the value of the normal launch ball counter that has been measured up to the time of power failure. The normal total prize ball number storage area stores the value of the normal total prize ball number counter measured by the time of power failure. The time-saving 100-ball storage area stores the value of the time-saving 100-ball counter that has been measured by the time of power failure. The time-saving launch ball number storage area stores the value of the time-saving launch ball counter that was measured by the time of power failure. The time-saving total prize ball number storage area stores the value of the time-saving total prize ball number counter measured by the time of power failure. The jackpot 100-ball storage area stores the value of the jackpot 100-ball counter measured by the time of power failure. The jackpot launch ball number storage area stores the value of the jackpot launch ball number counter measured up to the time of power failure. The jackpot total prize ball number storage area stores the value of the jackpot total prize ball number counter measured by the time of power failure. Similar to the second mode, the fluctuation number storage area stores the value of the fluctuation number counter measured up to the time of power failure. The reason why each of these values (hereinafter referred to as "measured value for base display") is stored in the special memory 89A is the same as the reason why the measured value for output rate display is stored in the special memory 89A in the second mode. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

In the modified example of the second form, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), a game RAM (volatile memory) 84A, which is a volatile storage means, has a normal 100-ball counter, a normal firing ball number counter, and a normal total. Prize ball number counter, normal base storage area, time saving 100 ball counter, time saving launch ball number counter, time saving total prize ball number counter, time saving base storage area, jackpot 100 ball counter, jackpot firing ball number counter, jackpot total prize ball A number counter, a jackpot base storage area, and a fluctuation count counter are provided. As a result, in the normal time when no power interruption occurs (when the monitored voltage is larger than 17V), even if the measured value for the base display is measured, the gaming RAM 84A is accessed, and the special memory is used. It does not access 89A. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the frequency of use (deterioration) of the special memory 89A.

Then, only when the power is cut off, the measured values for base display measured so far are transferred (copied) to the special memory 89A. That is, the value of the normal 100 ball counter, the value of the normal launch ball counter, the value of the normal total prize ball counter, the value of the time reduction 100 ball counter, and the value of the time reduction launch ball counter of the game RAM 84A. And, the value of the time saving total prize ball counter, the value of the jackpot 100 ball counter, the value of the jackpot launch ball counter, the value of the jackpot total prize ball counter, and the value of the fluctuation number counter are stored in a special memory. 89A normal 100 ball storage area, normal launch ball number storage area, normal total prize ball number storage area, time saving 100 ball storage area, time saving launch ball number storage area, time saving total prize ball number storage area, jackpot 100 ball storage area It is stored in the storage area, the jackpot launch ball number storage area, the jackpot total prize ball number storage area, and the fluctuation number storage area, respectively. This makes it possible to prevent the measured value for base display from being erased even if an abnormal situation occurs such as disconnection, poor contact, or intentional disconnection for several days.

If all the stored contents of the gaming RAM 84A are cleared when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) thereafter, the measured value for base display stored in the special memory 89A is transferred (copied) to the gaming RAM 84A. It has become. That is, even if the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on, it is possible to restart the measurement from the base display measurement value stored at the time of power failure. On the other hand, if the stored contents of the game RAM 84A are not cleared when the power is turned on, the base display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is collated with the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A.

If the above-mentioned collation results match, it is determined that the base display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is normal, and the measurement is restarted from the base display measurement value. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned collation results do not match, it is determined that the measured value for base display stored in the game RAM 84A is abnormal, and the output rate display stored in the special memory 89A is used. The measured value is transferred (copied) to the gaming RAM 84A. As a result, it is possible to restart the measurement from the measured value for base display stored in the special memory 89A, which is more likely to be normal. As described above, when the power is turned on, it is possible to restart the measurement while checking whether or not the measured value for base display stored in the gaming RAM 84A is normal.

[Power-on processing] In the power-on processing (S001) of the modified example of the second form shown in FIG. 79, the power-on processing (S001) of the second form shown in FIG. 75 is replaced with step S027. Step S028 is provided. If it is determined in step S015 that the checksum values of the gaming RAM 84A match, the process proceeds to step S028 through steps S016 and S017. In step S028, the base display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is collated with the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A. If the values of the measured values for each base display match (YES in S028), it is determined that the measured values for output rate display stored in the gaming RAM 84A are normal, and the step is performed without proceeding to step S026. Proceed to S025. On the other hand, if even one of the measured values for each base display does not match (NO in S028), it is judged that the measured value for base display stored in the game RAM 84A is abnormal, and it is special. The measured value for base display stored in the memory 89A is transferred to the gaming RAM 84A (S026). As described above, it is possible to decide whether or not to use the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A by the double check of the checksum collation of the game RAM 84A and the base display measurement value collation. ..

In the modified example of the first embodiment, the counter addition process (S151) shown in FIG. 67 was executed as the process of adding each counter provided in the special memory 89. On the other hand, in the modified example of the second form, as the process of adding each counter provided in the gaming RAM 84A, substantially the same process as the counter addition process (S151) shown in FIG. 67 is executed. ing. Further, in the power supply monitoring process (S108) of the second mode, the measured value for output rate display was transferred (copied) to each storage area provided in the special memory 89A in step S2908. On the other hand, in the power failure monitoring process (S108) of the modified example of the second form, the measured value for base display is transferred to each storage area provided in the special memory 89A instead of the process of step S2908 described above. It has become like.

As described above, according to the modified example of the second form, by storing the measured value for base display in the special memory 89A which is a non-volatile storage means at the time of power failure, even if the backup power supply is not supplied by any chance. It is possible to avoid erasing the measured value for base display. Then, when the power is turned on after that, it is possible to transfer the measured value for base display stored in the special memory 89A at the time of the previous power failure to the game RAM 84A which is a volatile storage means. As a result, it is possible to restart the measurement from the same value as the base display measurement value stored at the time of power failure. Since the action and effect of the other modified examples are only changed based on the output rate with respect to the action and effect of the second form described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Third form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third form will be described with reference to FIG. 67. As shown in FIG. 6, the output rate indicator 300 of the first form is arranged on the main control board 80. On the other hand, in the third form, the output rate indicator 300 is arranged in the rear side case 401A of the main board case 400A as shown in FIG. 80. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 80 (A), the output rate display 300 of the third form is integrally attached to the lower left of the rear side case 401A and is connected to the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC1. ing. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, the lighting control of the output rate display 300 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81. Here, as shown in FIG. 80A, the output rate display 300 of the third form is arranged parallel to the mounting surface (rear surface) 80a of the main control board 80, and is located at a position facing the integrated circuit IC9. It is in. Therefore, the output rate display 300 obstructs the line-of-sight of the lower left portion of the mounting surface 80a, and it is particularly difficult to confirm the product number or the like of the integrated circuit IC. The mounting surface 80a is a plate surface of the main control board 80 on which a large number of integrated circuits such as a game control microcomputer 81 and an integrated circuit IC9 are mounted.

Therefore, in the third form, the rear side case 401A to which the output rate indicator 300 is attached is configured to be movable. Specifically, the rear side case 401A is rotatably supported on the upper left end side of the front side case 402A via the rotation pin P1 at the upper part on the left end side thereof. Further, the rear side case 401A is rotatably supported by the lower part on the left end side of the front side case 402A via the rotation pin P2 at the lower part on the left end side. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 80 (A), (B), and (C), the rear case 401A can rotate around the rotation axis Q1 extending in the vertical direction on the left end side. In other words, the output rate display 300 can be rotated so as to reduce the region facing the mounting surface 80a. When the rear case 401A is rotated to the position shown in FIG. 80C, the output rate indicator 300 is in a non-opposing position that does not face the entire mounting surface 80a. In the third form, the rear side case 401A and the rotating pins P1 and P2 correspond to the moving mechanism portion.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third form, as shown in FIGS. 80 (A), (B), and (C), the output rate display 300 is moved with respect to the mounting surface 80a of the main control board 80. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower left portion of the mounting surface 80a from being hidden by the output rate display 300. Further, by not arranging the output rate indicator 300 on the main control board 80, each component on the main control board 80 must be brought together to secure an arrangement space for the output rate indicator 300 as in the first embodiment. It is possible to solve the problem that is not necessary.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third form, it is possible to easily realize a structure in which the lower left portion of the mounting surface 80a is visible by the rotation mechanism using the rear side case 401A and the rotation pins P1 and P2. Then, the output rate display 300 is rotated from a position facing the integrated circuit IC9 (see FIG. 80 (A)) to a non-opposing position not facing the entire mounting surface 80a (see FIG. 80C). Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to secure the visibility of the integrated circuit IC9, and further, it is possible to ensure the visibility of all the integrated circuits mounted on the mounting surface 80a. Since the other actions and effects of the third form are substantially the same as the above-mentioned actions and effects of the first form, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a first modification of the third form will be described with reference to FIG. 81. As shown in FIG. 81 (A), the output rate indicator 300 is attached to the lower left of the rear side case 401B of the main board case 400B, and is connected to the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC2. .. The rear side case 401B is rotatably supported on the upper left end side of the front side case 402B via a rotation pin P3 at the upper part on the left end side thereof. Further, the rear side case 401B is rotatably supported on the upper part on the right end side of the front side case 402B via the rotation pin P4 at the upper part on the right end side.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 81 (A), (B), and (C), the rear case 401B can rotate around the rotation axis Q2 extending in the left-right direction on the upper end side. By rotating the rear case 401B, the output rate display 300 moves from a position facing the integrated circuit IC9 (see FIG. 81A) to a non-opposing position not facing the entire mounting surface 80a (FIG. 81). It can rotate up to (see (C)). In this first modification, the rear side case 401A and the rotating pins P3 and P4 correspond to the moving mechanism portion. As described above, the third form described above and the first modified example mainly differ only in the rotation directions of the rear side cases 401A and 401B. Therefore, the action and effect of the first modification is substantially the same as the action and effect of the third form described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a second modification of the third form will be described with reference to FIG. 82. As shown in FIG. 82 (A), the output rate indicator 300 is attached to the lower left of the rear side case 401C of the main board case 400C and is connected to the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC3. .. The lower surface portion 401Ca of the rear side case 401C is placed on the upper side of the lower surface portion 402Ca of the front side case 402C, and can slide (slide) in the left-right direction.

However, the upper part of the left end surface of the rear side case 401C is locked to the upper locking piece 402a provided in the upper left portion of the front side case 402C. Further, the lower portion of the left end surface of the rear side case 401C is locked to the lower locking piece 402b provided at the lower left portion of the front side case 402C. Due to these lockings, the rear side case 401C is restricted from sliding in the left-right direction. On the other hand, if these locks are released, as shown in FIG. 82B, the lower surface portion 401Ca of the rear side case 401C can slide to the left with respect to the lower surface portion 402Ca of the front side case 402C. In this second modification, the rear side case 401C and the front side case 402C correspond to the moving mechanism portion.

According to the second modification of the third embodiment, a structure in which the lower left portion of the mounting surface 80a can be seen can be easily realized by the slide mechanism using the rear side case 401C and the front side case 402C. Then, the output rate indicator 300 is moved to the left from a position facing the integrated circuit IC9 (see FIG. 82 (A)) to a non-opposing position not facing the entire mounting surface 80a (see FIG. 82 (B)). Can be slid. Therefore, it is possible to secure the visibility of the integrated circuit IC9, and further, it is possible to ensure the visibility of all the integrated circuits mounted on the mounting surface 80a. Since the other effects of the second modification are substantially the same as those of the third form described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a third modification of the third form will be described with reference to FIG. 83. As shown in FIG. 83 (A), the output rate indicator 300 is attached to the lower left of the rear side case 401D of the main board case 400D, and is connected to the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC4. .. The left end portion 401Da of the rear side case 401D is fitted in an uneven shape with respect to the left end portion 402Da of the front side case 402D, and can slide (slide) in the vertical direction. Further, the right end portion 401Db of the rear side case 401D is fitted in an uneven shape with respect to the right end portion 402Db of the front side case 402D, and is slidable in the vertical direction.

However, the lower surface of the left end portion 401Da of the rear side case 401D is locked to the left side locking piece 402c provided below the left end portion 402Da of the front side case 402D. Further, the lower surface of the right end portion 401Db of the rear side case 401D is locked to the right side locking piece 402d provided below the right end portion 402Db of the front side case 402D. By these lockings, the rear side case 401D is restricted from sliding in the vertical direction. On the other hand, when these locks are released, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the left end portion 401Da and the right end portion 401Db of the rear side case 401D with respect to the left end portion 402Da and the right end portion 402Db of the front side case 402D. It can slide up and down. In this third modification, the rear side case 401D and the front side case 402D correspond to the moving mechanism portion. As described above, the second modification and the third modification described above differ only in the sliding directions of the rear case 401C and 401D. Therefore, the action and effect of the third modification is substantially the same as the action and effect of the second modification described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The above-mentioned third form (see FIG. 80), the first modification of the third form (see FIG. 81), the second modification of the third form (see FIG. 82), and the third modification of the third form. In the example (see FIG. 83), the output rate display 300 is configured to be movable. However, instead of the output rate display 300, the base display 300 as described in the modified example of the first form or the modified example of the second form may be configured to be movable. Since the action and effect in this case is only changed based on the output rate with respect to the action and effect of the above-mentioned third form or each modification thereof, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Fourth form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth form will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 88. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the output rate can be displayed on the output rate display 300 as a component component of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the other hand, in the fourth mode, as shown in FIG. 84, the external output rate display device (external device) 900, which is not a component included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, can display the output rate. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 84A, the external output rate display device 900 includes a display unit 910, a changeover switch 920, a connection cable 930, and a connector CN4. The display unit 910 is composed of a so-called 4-unit 7-segment display having four lighting areas, similarly to the output rate display 300 described above. The changeover switch 920 switches between the ON state and the OFF state of the external output rate display device 900. The connection cable 930 is a flexible cable having a connector CN4 at one end and having a certain length to facilitate the connection of the connector CN4. The connector CN4 is connected to the connector CN3 provided on the main control board 80, which will be described later.

In this fourth mode, the connector (connection portion) CN3 provided on the main control board 80 is configured to output the output rate display signal to the external output rate display device 900. The output rate display signal is a signal for displaying the output rate on the external output rate display device 900. The connector CN3 is a connector provided exclusively for each connector provided on the existing main control board 80. However, an existing connector may be used so that the output rate display signal is output from the connector.

As shown in FIG. 84 (B), the connector CN4 of the external output rate display device 900 is connected to the connector CN3 of the main control board 80, and the external output rate display device 900 is turned on by operating the changeover switch 920. .. As a result, the output rate display signal is output from the main control board 80 to the external output rate display device 900 via the connector CN3. As a result, in the external output rate display device 900 to which the output rate display signal is input, the output rate and the displayed output rate are the same as in the first mode (see FIG. 26) in the four lighting areas of the display unit 910. It is possible to indicate whether it is a bonus ratio or a continuous bonus ratio, and whether the displayed output rate is an effective value or a reference value.

Further, as shown in FIG. 85, a serial communication circuit 170 is provided on the main control board 80. The serial communication circuit 170 is for performing serial communication with the external output rate display device 900 connected to the connector CN3, and is connected to the game control microcomputer 81. The external output rate display device 900 is also provided with a serial communication circuit. By these serial communication circuits, it is possible to transmit the output rate display signal (serial signal) from the game control microcomputer 81 to the external output rate display device 900 by serial communication.

Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the drive circuit 200F of the fourth form has the same configuration as the existing drive circuit for displaying game information. That is, unlike the drive circuit 200 of the first form (see FIG. 15), a circuit unit for displaying the output rate is not newly added. This is because the circuit unit for displaying the output rate is provided in the external output rate display device 900. Therefore, it is possible to display the output rate on the external output rate display device 900 without changing the design of the existing drive circuit 200F that displays the game information.

[Input Process] In the fourth form of input process (S101) shown in FIG. 87, steps S123 and S124 are newly provided with respect to the first form of input process (S101) shown in FIG. 45. As shown in FIG. 87, if the game control microcomputer 81 determines in step S111 that it is not a winning detection signal (NO in S111), the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S123. In step S123, it is determined whether or not a connection signal has been input from the external output rate display device 900 via the connector CN3 and the serial communication circuit 170. The connection signal is a signal output from the external output rate display device 900 to the main control board 80 when the external output rate display device 900 is in the ON state and the connector CN4 is connected to the connector CN3. If the connection signal is input (YES in S123), the serial communication circuit setting process for causing the serial communication circuit 170 to perform serial communication with the external output rate display device 900 is executed (S124), and the process proceeds to step S122. On the other hand, if no connection signal has been input (NO in S123), step S124 is passed and step S122 proceeds.

[Output Processing] In the fourth form of output processing (S107) shown in FIG. 88, first, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a game display processing (see S2303 and FIG. 53). That is, in the output process (S107) of the fourth form, unlike the output process (S107) of the first form shown in FIG. 52, the game display process (S2303) and the output rate display process (S2304) are selectively performed. Since this is not the case, the game display process (S2303) is always executed. Therefore, it is possible to display the game information on the game display 40 while displaying the output rate on the external output rate display device 900. After step S2303, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned connection signal is input (S2315). If not entered (NO in S2315), proceed to step S2305.

On the other hand, if it has been input (YES in S2315), the signal output process is executed (S2316), and the process proceeds to step S2305. In the signal output process (S2316), the output rate display signal is output to the connector CN3 via the serial communication circuit 170. In this output rate display signal, information (specifically, the accessory ratio storage area) of the output rate (role ratio, continuous accessory ratio) calculated by the output rate calculation process (S117, see FIG. 47) is stored. (Value stored in the continuous accessory ratio storage area), information on the value of the fluctuation count counter, information on the value of the actual total prize ball counter, and the like. As a result, the external output rate display device 900 connected to the connector CN3 determines whether the output rate, the accessory ratio, or the continuous accessory ratio is displayed on the display unit 910 based on the input output rate display signal. It is possible to indicate whether it is a valid value or a reference value.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth form, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the output rate can be confirmed by displaying the output rate on the display unit 910 of the external output rate display device 900. It is possible. Further, the connector CN4 of the external output rate display device 900 is connected to the connector CN3 only when the output rate is confirmed, and when the output rate is not confirmed, the external output rate display is displayed as shown in FIG. 84 (A). The connector CN4 of the device 900 can be removed from the connector CN3. That is, unlike the first mode described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not always provided with the output rate display 300 for displaying the output rate. Therefore, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the output rate can be confirmed with a small design change to the existing pachinko gaming machine.

In short, since it is not necessary to dispose the output rate display 300 and the circuit unit for displaying the output rate on the main control board 80, each component on the main control board 80 is brought together as in the first embodiment to arrange the space. It is possible to solve the problem that must be secured. And while providing the output rate indicator 300 for all pachinko gaming machines increases the cost, it is possible to suppress the increase in cost by providing only the connector CN3 as in the fourth form. Is. That is, when checking the output rate, it is sufficient to check the pachinko gaming machines one by one, and it is not necessary to check a plurality of pachinko gaming machines at the same time. Therefore, since it is sufficient to prepare one external output rate display device 900 for the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 of the fourth mode, it can be carried out at low cost. Since the external output rate display device 900 is an external device, it is possible to prepare many types (variations) of the external device.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth form, the output rate display signal includes information on the output rate (feature ratio, continuous bonus ratio) calculated by the output rate calculation process (S117). .. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 calculates the output rate, and the external output rate display device 900 does not calculate the output rate. Therefore, it is possible to carry out with a device having only a display function without preparing a special device capable of calculating the output rate as an external device.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth form, as shown in FIG. 85, since the main control board 80 includes the serial communication circuit 170, the external output rate display device connected to the connector CN3 by serial communication. It is possible to display the output rate on the 900. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of wirings (signals) for displaying the output rate as compared with the case where the output rate is displayed on the external output rate display device 900 by parallel communication. That is, by reducing the number of wirings connecting the main control board 80 and the external output rate display device 900, it is possible to reduce the design change with respect to the main control board 80.

In the fourth mode, the output rate display signal includes information on the output rate (combined value ratio, continuous accessory ratio) calculated by the output rate calculation process (S117). However, it may be changed as follows. That is, the output rate display signal does not include the output rate information, but the information of the actual total prize ball counter value (total prize ball number) and the value of the bonus ball number counter (character prize ball number). And the information of the value of the continuous prize ball number counter (the number of continuous prize balls) are included. In this case, when the external output rate display device connected to the connector CN3 inputs the output rate display signal, information on the total number of prize balls, information on the number of prize balls for prizes, and information on the number of consecutive prize balls Calculate the output rate based on. Then, the external output rate display device displays the calculated output rate on the display unit. In this way, unlike the fourth aspect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can not calculate the output rate, and the burden of control processing by the gaming control microcomputer 81 can be reduced. That is, it is possible not to provide the output rate calculation process (117).

<Modified example of the fourth form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 as a modified example of the fourth form will be described with reference to FIG. 89. In the fourth aspect, the external output rate display device (external device) 900, which is not a component of the pachinko gaming machine 1, can display the output rate. On the other hand, in the modified example of the fourth form, the base can be displayed by the external base display device (external device) 900, which is not a component included in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The external base display device 900 has exactly the same hardware configuration as the external output rate display device 900 (see FIG. 84) described above, and is simply renamed.

In the modified example of the fourth form, the connector (connection portion) CN3 provided on the main control board 80 is configured to output the base display signal to the external base display device 900. The base display signal is a signal for displaying the base on the external base display device 900. This base display signal includes information on the normal base, the time saving base, and the jackpot base calculated by the base calculation process (S152, see FIG. 68), and is counted by the counter addition process (S161, see FIG. 67). It contains information on the value of the normal launch ball counter, the value of the time-saving launch ball counter, and the value of the jackpot launch ball counter. Further, information on the value of the fluctuation counter is also included.

By connecting the connector CN4 of the external base display device 900 (see FIG. 84 (B)) to the connector CN3 of the main control board 80 as in the fourth embodiment described above, the main control board 80 is connected to the connector CN3 via the connector CN3. The base display signal can be output to the external base display device 900. As a result, in the external base display device 900 to which the base display signal is input, the base and the displayed base are the normal base and the time saving base in the four lighting areas of the display unit 910 (see FIG. 84 (B)). It is possible to indicate which of the jackpot bases and whether the displayed base is a valid value or a reference value.

The main control board 80 is provided with a serial communication circuit 170 (see FIG. 85) as described in the fourth embodiment. The serial communication circuit 170 is for performing serial communication with the external base display device 900 connected to the connector CN3, and is connected to the game control microcomputer 81. The external base display device 900 is also provided with a serial communication circuit. By these serial communication circuits, it is possible to transmit a base display signal (serial signal) from the game control microcomputer 81 to the external base display device 900 by serial communication.

[Input Processing] In the input processing (S101) of the modified example of the fourth form shown in FIG. 89, steps S158 and S159 are newly provided with respect to the input process (S101) of the modified example of the first form shown in FIG. Has been done. As shown in FIG. 89, if the game control microcomputer 81 determines in step S150 that it is not a ball entry detection signal (NO in S150), it proceeds to step S158. In step S158, it is determined whether or not a connection signal has been input from the external base display device 900 via the connector CN3 and the serial communication circuit 170. The connection signal is a signal output from the external base display device 900 to the main control board 80 when the external base display device 900 is in the ON state and the connector CN4 is connected to the connector CN3. If the connection signal is input (YES in S158), the serial communication circuit setting process for causing the serial communication circuit 170 to perform serial communication with the external base display device 900 is executed (S159), and the process proceeds to step S122. On the other hand, if no connection signal has been input (NO in S158), step S159 is passed and step S122 proceeds.

As described above, according to the modified example of the fourth form, it is possible to confirm the base by displaying the base on the display unit 910 of the external base display device 900 (see FIG. 84 (B)). Further, the connector CN4 of the external base display device 900 can be connected to the connector CN3 only when checking the base, and the connector CN4 of the external base display device 900 can be removed from the connector CN3 when the base is not checked. Yes (see FIG. 84 (A)). Therefore, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the base can be confirmed with a small design change to the existing pachinko gaming machine. Since the action and effect of the other modified examples are only changed based on the output rate with respect to the action and effect of the fourth form described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the modified example of the fourth form, the base display signal includes information on the normal base, the time saving base, and the jackpot base calculated by the base calculation process (S152, see FIG. 68). However, it may be changed as follows. That is, the base display signal does not include the base information, and the value of the normal launch ball counter, the value of the time-saving launch ball counter, and the jackpot launch ball number counted by the counter addition process (S161, see FIG. 67). In addition to the counter value information, the value of the normal total prize ball counter, the value of the time-saving total prize ball counter, and the value of the jackpot total prize ball counter are included. In this case, when the external base display device connected to the connector CN3 inputs the base display signal, the base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base) is calculated based on the values of the respective counters described above. Then, the external base display device displays the calculated base on the display unit. In this way, unlike the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can not calculate the base, and the burden of the control processing by the gaming control microcomputer 81 can be reduced. That is, it is possible not to provide the base arithmetic processing (S152).

<Fifth form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth form will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. In the first embodiment, even if the output rate is not displayed on the output rate display 300, the previously displayed output rate is displayed on the output rate display 300 as it is. On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the output rate is not displayed on the output rate display 300, "---" is displayed on the output rate display 300 as shown in FIG. 90. There is. That is, the output rate lighting unit LB7 is lit in the first lighting area 310, the output rate lighting unit LB15 is lit in the second lighting area 320, and the output rate lighting unit LB23 is lit in the third lighting area 330. The output rate lighting unit LB31 is lit in the fourth lighting area 340. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

[Output Processing] In the fifth form of output processing (S107) shown in FIG. 91, steps S2311, S2312, and S2313 are newly provided with respect to the first form of output processing (S107) shown in FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 91, if the game machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), the game control microcomputer 81 undergoes the output rate display process. (S2304), turn off the change completion flag (S2311). The change completion flag indicates that the display of "---" has been completed on the output rate display 300 as described later.

On the other hand, if the game machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the output rate is not displayed on the output rate display 300. In this case, it is determined in step S2312 whether or not the change completion flag is ON. If it is not ON (NO in S2312), the output rate display 300 displays "---", so that the display change process described later is executed (S2313). On the other hand, if the change completion flag is ON (YES in S2312), the display of "---" is completed on the output rate display 300, so the game display process is executed as described above (S2303). ..

[Display change process] As shown in FIG. 92, in the display change process (S2313), first, it is determined whether or not the change flag is "1" (S2801). The change flag is set to any value of "1" or "2" or "3" or "4", and any of the four lighting areas 310 to 340 of the output rate indicator 300 is lit. It indicates whether to display "-" in the area. If the change flag is "1" (YES in S2801), the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [1000] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2802), and the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is set to "1". Switch to "H" (S2803). Subsequently, in order to display "-", data information D [0 ... 7] = D [00000010] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2804), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H". (S2805). As a result, in the first lighting area 310, only the output rate lighting unit LB7 is lit, and “−” is displayed. Then, the change flag is set to "2" (S2806), and this process ends.

If the change flag is not "1" in step S2801, it is subsequently determined whether the change flag is "2" (S2807). If the change flag is "2" (YES in S2807), data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0100] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2808), and the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is set to "2". Switch to "H" (S2809). Subsequently, in order to display "-", data information D [0 ... 7] = D [00000010] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2810), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H". (S2811). As a result, in the second lighting area 320, only the output rate lighting unit LB15 is lit and “−” is displayed. Then, the change flag is set to "3" (S2812), and this process ends.

If the change flag is not "2" in step S2807, it is subsequently determined whether the change flag is "3" (S2813). If the change flag is "3" (YES in S2813), the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0010] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2814), and the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is set to "3". Switch to "H" (S2815). Subsequently, in order to display "-", data information D [0 ... 7] = D [00000010] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2816), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H". (S2817). As a result, in the third lighting area 330, only the output rate lighting unit LB23 is lit, and “−” is displayed. Then, the change flag is set to "4" (S2818), and this process ends.

If the change flag is not "3" in step S2813, the change flag is "4", and the process proceeds to step S2819. In step S2819, the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0001] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3, and then the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" (S2820). Subsequently, in order to display "-", data information D [0 ... 7] = D [00000010] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2821), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H". (S2822). As a result, in the fourth lighting area 340, only the output rate lighting unit LB31 is lit and "-" is displayed. Then, the change completion flag is turned ON (S2823), the change flag is set to "1" (S2824), and this process is completed.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth form, when the display condition that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and the customer is waiting is satisfied, the first lighting area 310 of the output rate display 300 The mode of the second lighting area 320 (display area) is a numerical mode (for example, “60”, see FIG. 26) indicating the output rate. This makes it possible to confirm the output rate. On the other hand, when the display condition is not satisfied (the game is in progress), the mode of the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 of the output rate indicator 300 becomes “−−” (non-numerical mode). Therefore, it is possible to reliably recognize that the output rate is not displayed. In this way, during the progress of the game, the output rate when the display condition is satisfied remains as it is and is displayed, and it is possible to avoid misunderstanding that the output rate is the current rate. In particular, even when the game machine frame 50 is opened and the output rate display 300 is viewed, the special symbol is still being displayed in a variable manner, or the game ball enters the starting ports 20 and 21 and the game continues. Is possible. At this time, it is possible to prevent the person who confirms the output rate from judging whether or not the output rate is abnormal based on the output rate that remains and is displayed before.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth form, the payout rate is displayed without calculating the payout rate during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol or the control to the jackpot game state (when the game control state is in effect). The mode of the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 of the vessel 300 is set to “−−”. That is, when the output rate is not displayed on the output rate display 300, the useless control process of calculating the output rate is not performed. In the game control state, the burden of control processing is heavier than in the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of control processing by the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) by not calculating and displaying the output rate in the game control state where the load of control processing is heavy. Is. Since the other actions and effects of the fifth form are substantially the same as the above-mentioned actions and effects of the first form, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth mode, when the display condition is not satisfied (the output rate display process (S2304) is not executed), the output rate can be displayed in the display area (first lighting area 310 and) as shown in FIG. 90. “−−” Was displayed in the second lighting area 320). However, if it can be recognized that the output rate is not displayed, the display mode may be other than "---" and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the display area in which the output rate can be displayed may be a non-display mode in which nothing is displayed (a mode in which each output rate lighting unit is turned off), and a predetermined specification such as "77" may be used. (A mode different from the numerical mode indicating the output rate) may be used.

<Modified example of the fifth form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 as a modified example of the fifth form will be described with reference to FIG. 93. In the fifth mode, when the output rate is not displayed on the output rate display 300, "---" is displayed on the output rate display 300 (see FIG. 90). On the other hand, in the modified example of the fifth form, when the base is not displayed on the base display 300, "---" is displayed on the base display 300.

[Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the modified example of the fifth form shown in FIG. 93, steps S2311, S2312, and S2313 are newly added to the output process (S107) of the modified example of the first form shown in FIG. 69. It is provided in. As shown in FIG. 93, if the game machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), the game control microcomputer 81 undergoes base display processing (YES in S2302). S2340), turn off the change completion flag (S2311). On the other hand, if the game machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the base is not displayed on the base display 300. In this case, it is determined in step S2312 whether or not the change completion flag is ON. If it is not ON (NO in S2312), the above-mentioned display change process is executed in order to display "---" on the base display 300 (see S2313 and FIG. 92). On the other hand, if the change completion flag is ON (YES in S2312), the display of "---" is completed on the base display 300, so the game display process is executed as described above (S2303).

As described above, according to the modified example of the fifth form, when the display condition that the game machine frame 50 is open and the customer is waiting is satisfied, the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 310 of the base display 300 are satisfied. The mode of the lighting area 320 (display area) is a numerical mode indicating the base. This makes it possible to confirm the base. On the other hand, when the display condition is not satisfied (the game is in progress), the mode of the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 of the base display 300 becomes “−−” (non-numerical mode). Therefore, it is possible to reliably recognize that the base is not displayed. In this way, during the progress of the game, the base when the display condition is satisfied remains as it is and is displayed, and it is possible to avoid misidentifying it as the base at the present time. Since the action and effect of the other modified examples are only changed based on the output rate with respect to the action and effect of the fifth form described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the modified example of the fifth form, when the display condition is not satisfied (the base display process (S2340) is not executed), the display area where the base can be displayed (first lighting area 310 and second lighting area 320). "---" was displayed. However, if it can be recognized that the base is not displayed, the display mode may be other than "---" and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the display area in which the base can be displayed may be a non-display mode in which nothing is displayed (a mode in which the light is turned off), and a specific numerical mode (a number indicating the base) determined in advance such as "77". A mode different from the mode) may be used.

<6th form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the sixth form will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. In the first form, the output rate display 300 indicates that the accessory ratio does not exceed 70% (70%) or the continuous accessory ratio does not exceed 60% (60%). It is supposed to be confirmed by the rate. On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, it is confirmed by the light emitting mode of the special LED 350 that the accessory ratio does not exceed 70% or the continuous accessory ratio does not exceed 60%. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 94, the special LED (abnormality notification means, notification means, light emitting means) 350 is arranged on the main control board 80, and the light emitting mode can be changed. In the game control microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80, the modes of the special LED 350 are shown in FIG. 94 (A), a lighting mode (first light emitting mode) shown in FIG. It is possible to switch to the blinking mode (second light emitting mode) shown in).

In the sixth form, when displaying the output rate, the total number of prize balls acquired from the time when the power is first turned on to the present time is less than 10,000, and it is special from the time when the power is first turned on to the present time. When the number of fluctuations in which the symbol variation display is executed is less than 3000, the mode of the special LED 350 is set to the extinguishing mode. As a result, the person who sees the special LED 350 in the extinguished mode is made to understand that the output rate may not have converged yet.

When displaying the payout rate, when the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more, or the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more, the bonus ratio does not exceed 70% or the continuous prize ratio exceeds 60%. If not, the mode of the special LED 350 is changed to the lighting mode. As a result, the person who sees the special LED 350 in the lighting mode is made to understand that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been tampered with as a result of the output rate that has converged to some extent. On the other hand, when the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more, or the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more, the bonus ratio exceeds 70% (specified value) or the continuous character ratio exceeds 60% (specified value). If it exceeds, the mode of the special LED 350 is changed to the blinking mode. As a result, the person who sees the special LED 350 in the blinking mode is made to understand that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been tampered with or malfunctioned as a result of the output rate that has converged to some extent.

[Output Process] In the sixth form of output process (S107) shown in FIG. 95, steps S2308, S2309, and S2310 are newly provided with respect to the first form of output process (S107) shown in FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 95, in the game control microcomputer 81, if the game machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), a predetermined game RAM 84 is set. It is determined whether or not the lighting mode data or the blinking mode data is set in the storage area (S2308). The lighting mode data is data for making the special LED 350 in the lighting mode, and the blinking mode data is data for making the special LED 350 in the blinking mode. If these data are set (YES in S2308), the extinguishing mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2309), and the game display process is executed (S2303). The extinguishing mode data is data for turning off the special LED 350. In this way, when displaying the game information related to the progress of the game on the game display 40, the special LED 350 is always turned off, and the power consumption can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the game machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), after executing the output rate display processing (S2304), the special LED processing is executed. (S2310).

[Special LED processing] As shown in FIG. 96, in the special LED processing (S2310), is the value of the actual total prize ball counter of the special memory 89 "100" or more (the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more)? Determine if not (S2701). If it is less than "100" (NO in S2701), then it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation count counter of the special memory 89 is "3000" or more (S2702). If it is less than "3000" (NO in S2702), the extinguishing mode data is set in the predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2708), and this process ends. In this way, when the total number of prize balls is less than 10,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3,000, the special LED 350 is turned off.

On the other hand, if the value of the actual total prize ball counter is "100" or more (YES in S2701), or if the value of the fluctuation count counter is "3000" or more (YES in S2702), then it is displayed. Determine if the flag is "1" (S2703). If it is "1" (YES in S2703), then it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus ratio stored in the bonus ratio storage area of the special memory 89 exceeds "70" (S2704). If it does not exceed (NO in S2704), the lighting mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2707), and this process ends. If the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2703), it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous accessory ratio stored in the continuous accessory ratio storage area of the special memory 89 exceeds "60". (S2705). If it does not exceed (NO in S2705), the lighting mode data is set (S2707), and this process ends. In this way, on the condition that the output rate is an effective value that has converged to some extent, when the accessory ratio does not exceed 70% or the continuous accessory ratio does not exceed 60%, the mode of the special LED 350 becomes the lighting mode. Become.

On the other hand, when the value of the accessory ratio exceeds "70" in step S2704, or when the value of the continuous accessory ratio exceeds "60" in step S2705, a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 Set the blinking mode data in (S2706), and finish this process. In this way, the mode of the special LED 350 changes to the blinking mode when the bonus ratio exceeds 70% or the continuous bonus ratio exceeds 60%, provided that the output rate is an effective value that has converged to some extent. Become.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the sixth aspect, when the accessory ratio exceeds 70% or the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, the special LED 350 switches from the lighting mode or the extinguishing mode to the blinking mode. Therefore, the person who confirms the output rate, by grasping that the special LED 350 is in the blinking mode, is simpler and more immediate than the case where the output rate is confirmed by the output rate display 300, the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is possible to determine that an unauthorized modification or failure has occurred (confirm an abnormality in the output rate). Further, when the special LED 350 is in the lighting mode, it can be easily and immediately determined that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been tampered with or malfunctioned as a result of the output rate having converged to some extent. Is. On the other hand, when the special LED 350 is turned off, it can be easily and immediately determined that the output rate has not yet converged. Since the other actions and effects of the sixth form are substantially the same as those of the first form described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Modified example of the sixth form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 as a modified example of the sixth form will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. In the sixth mode, it is confirmed by the light emitting mode of the special LED 350 whether the output rate is within the normal range (the accessory ratio does not exceed 70% and the continuous accessory ratio does not exceed 60%). I did. On the other hand, in the modified example of the sixth form, it is confirmed by the light emitting mode of the special LED 350 whether or not the base is within the normal range.

Here, the case where the base is within the normal range will be described. In the modified example of the sixth form, if the normal base is 30% or more and 39% or less, the normal base is within the normal range. If the time saving base is 84% or more and 99% or less, the time saving base is within the normal range. If the jackpot base is 600% or more and 800% or less, the jackpot base is within the normal range. Then, if all of the normal base, the time saving base, and the jackpot base are within the normal range, it is determined that the base is within the normal range. On the other hand, if any one of the normal base, the time saving base and the jackpot base is out of the normal range (abnormal range), it is determined that the base is out of the normal range.

Further, in the modified example of the sixth form, when displaying the base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base), the total number of fired balls from the power on to the present time is less than 100,000, and the power is turned on. If the number of fluctuations in which the special symbol variation display has been executed is less than 3000 times since then, the mode of the special LED is set to the extinguishing mode. As a result, the person who sees the special LED 350 in the extinguished mode is made to understand that the base may not have converged yet.

When displaying the base, if the total number of shot balls is 100,000 or more, or the number of fluctuations is 3,000 or more, and the base is within the normal range, the mode of the special LED 350 is set to the lighting mode. As a result, the person who sees the special LED 350 in the lighting mode is made to understand that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been tampered with or malfunctioned as a result of the base that has converged to some extent. On the other hand, when the total number of shot balls is 100,000 or more, or the number of fluctuations is 3,000 or more, and the base is out of the normal range (abnormal range), the mode of the special LED 350 is set to the blinking mode. As a result, the person who sees the special LED 350 in the blinking mode is made to understand that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been tampered with or malfunctioned as a result of convergence to some extent.

[Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the sixth form shown in FIG. 97, steps S2308, S2309, and S2341 are newly provided with respect to the output processing (S107) of the modified example of the first form shown in FIG. 69. ing. As shown in FIG. 97, in the game control microcomputer 81, if the game machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), a predetermined game RAM 84 is set. It is determined whether or not the lighting mode data or the blinking mode data is set in the storage area (S2308). If these data are set (YES in S2308), the extinguishing mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2309), and the game display process is executed (S2303). On the other hand, if the game machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), after executing the base display process (see S2340, FIGS. 70 to 73). The special LED processing described later is executed (S2341).

[Special LED processing] As shown in FIG. 98, in the special LED processing (S2341), the total number of shot balls (the number of shot balls in the normal game state, the number of shot balls in the time saving state, and the number of shot balls in the jackpot game state). It is determined whether or not the total number of shots is 100,000 or more (S2710). That is, it is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the normal launch ball counter, the value of the time-saving launch ball counter, and the value of the jackpot launch ball counter is "1000" or more. If the number of departures is less than "100,000" (NO in S2710), then it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation count counter is "3000" or more (S2711). If it is less than "3000" (NO in S2711), the extinguishing mode data is set in the predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2715), and this process ends. In this way, when the total number of shot balls is less than 100,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3,000, the special LED 350 is turned off.

On the other hand, if the total number of shots is "100,000" or more (YES in S2710) or the number of fluctuations is "3000" or more (YES in S2711), whether the base is within the normal range Is determined (S2712). That is, the normal base is 30% or more and 39% or less, the time saving base is 84% or more and 99% or less, and the jackpot base is 600% or more and 800% or less. It is determined whether or not any of the conditions is satisfied. If the base is within the normal range (YES in S2712), the lighting mode data is set in the predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2713), and this process ends. In this way, the mode of the special LED 350 becomes the lighting mode when the base is within the normal range on condition that the base has a value converged to some extent.

On the other hand, if the base is not within the normal range (NO in S2712), the blinking mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2714), and this process ends. In this way, the mode of the special LED 350 becomes the blinking mode when the base is out of the normal range, provided that the base has a value converged to some extent.

As described above, according to the modified example of the sixth form, when the base is out of the normal range from the normal range, the special LED 350 switches from the lighting mode (or the extinguishing mode) to the blinking mode. Therefore, the person who confirms the base is more likely to be illegal in the pachinko gaming machine 1 than when confirming the base on the base display 300 by grasping that the special LED 350 is blinking. It is possible to determine that a modification or failure has occurred (confirm an abnormality in the base). In addition, when the special LED 350 is in the lighting mode, it is possible to easily and immediately determine that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been tampered with or malfunctioned as a result of the base having converged to some extent. is there. On the other hand, when the special LED 350 is turned off, it can be easily and immediately determined that the base has not yet converged. Since the action and effect of the other modified examples are only changed based on the output rate with respect to the action and effect of the sixth form described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<7th form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the seventh form will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 104. In the sixth embodiment, after calculating the output rate, it is notified whether or not the calculated output rate (combined value ratio or continuous accessory ratio) exceeds the specified value (70% or 60%). On the other hand, in the seventh form, even if the output rate is not calculated, it is notified whether or not the output rate substantially exceeds the specified value. Hereinafter, the points different from the first form and the sixth form will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 99, in the seventh embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment described above, special LEDs (notification means, abnormality notification means, light emitting means) are arranged on the main control board 80. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 81 describes the modes of the special LED 350 as the extinguishing mode shown in FIG. 99 (A), the lighting mode (first mode) shown in FIG. 99 (B), and the blinking mode shown in FIG. 99 (C). It is possible to switch to the mode (second mode). In the seventh embodiment, the output rate display 300 is not arranged on the main control board 80, and the game control microcomputer 81 does not execute the output rate display process (S2304). Therefore, the drive circuit of the seventh form has the same configuration as the existing drive circuit that displays the game information, like the drive circuit 200F of the fourth form (see FIG. 86) described above.

Here, a method of determining whether or not the output rate exceeds the specified value (whether or not it is within the normal range) without calculating the output rate will be described. For example, when the total number of prize balls is 10,000 (the value of the actual total prize ball counter is "100"), the prize ratio exceeds 70% because the number of prize balls is The situation is that the number of shots exceeds 7,000. Further, for example, when the total number of prize balls is 15,000, the bonus ratio exceeds 70%, which means that the number of prize balls exceeds 10,500. In this way, when the total number of prize balls is a predetermined total number of determined total prize balls (10000 shots and 15000 shots described above), the number of prize balls for the accessory is a reference outlier (7000 shots and 10500 shots described above). ), It will be possible to judge whether or not the prize ratio exceeds 70% at that time. Utilizing this point, in the seventh embodiment, it is determined whether or not the accessory ratio substantially exceeds 70% only by the magnitude determination at a certain timing without sequentially calculating the accessory ratio. In the above description, the accessory ratio has been described as an example, but since the same applies to the continuous accessory ratio, the description thereof will be omitted.

Thus, in the seventh embodiment, the simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 100 is stored in the ROM 83 of the game control microcomputer 81. As shown in FIG. 100, the simple abnormality determination table determines the value of the total number of prize balls (judgment total number of prize balls) that is the determination timing, and whether the accessory ratio exceeds 70% at the determination timing. The value of the number of prize balls for the prize (abnormal judgment value) and the value of the number of prize balls for the continuous prize (abnormal judgment) for judging whether or not the ratio of the continuous prizes exceeds 60% at the judgment timing. Value) and.

With reference to this simple abnormality determination table, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the total number of prize balls has reached the determined total number of prize balls. Then, if the total number of determined prize balls has been reached, it is further determined whether or not the number of bonus balls exceeds the reference outlier, or whether or not the number of continuous prize balls exceeds the reference outlier. It has become like. As a result, if the standard abnormal value is exceeded, the output rate (role ratio, continuous accessory ratio) exceeds the specified value (70%, 60%), and the mode of the special LED 350 is changed to the blinking mode. To do. On the other hand, if the reference abnormal value is not exceeded, the output rate does not exceed the specified value, and the mode of the special LED 350 is set to the lighting mode. In the seventh embodiment, it is assumed that the output rate value has not substantially converged until the number of fluctuations reaches 3000, and the mode of the special LED 350 is set to the extinguishing mode.

[Input Process] In the output process (S101) of the seventh form shown in FIG. 101, step S127 is provided instead of steps S115 to S121 of the input process (S101) of the first form shown in FIG. 45. As shown in FIG. 84, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a simple abnormality determination process after executing the prize ball counter addition process in step S114 (S127).

[Simple abnormality determination process] As shown in FIG. 102, in the simple abnormality determination process (S127), first, the simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 100 is referred to (S130). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the total number of prize balls at the present time has reached the determined total number of prize balls (10000 shots, 15000 shots, 20000 shots, 25000 shots ...) (S131). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the actual total prize ball counter (see FIG. 11C) is 100, 150, 200, 250 .... If the total number of judgment balls has not been reached (NO in S131), this process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of judgment total prize balls has been reached (YES in S131), it is judged whether or not the current number of prize balls for the character exceeds the standard outlier corresponding to the total number of judgment total prize balls (S132). ). For example, when the value of the actual total prize ball counter reaches "100", it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus ball counter exceeds "7000". If it exceeds (YES in S132), turn on the error flag (S133) and end this process. The anomaly flag indicates that the output rate substantially exceeds the specified value.

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls for the prize does not exceed the standard outlier (NO in S132), then whether the number of consecutive prize balls at the present time exceeds the standard outlier corresponding to the total number of judgment total prize balls. Determine if not (S134). For example, when the value of the actual total prize ball counter reaches "100", it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous prize ball counter exceeds "6000". If it exceeds (YES in S134), the abnormality flag is turned ON (S133), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it does not exceed (NO in S134), the abnormality flag is turned off (S135), and this process ends.

[Output Process] In the output process (S107) of the seventh form shown in FIG. 103, step S2320 is provided instead of steps S2304 and S2310 of the output process (S107) of the sixth form shown in FIG. 95. As shown in FIG. 103, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the special LED processing when the game machine frame 50 is closed (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302). (S2330).

[Special LED processing] As shown in FIG. 104, in the special LED processing (S2330), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation count counter of the special memory 89 is "3000" or more (the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more). (S2720). If it is "3000" or more (YES in S2720), it is determined whether or not the abnormality flag is ON (S2721). If the abnormality flag is ON (YES in S2721), the output rate substantially exceeds the specified value. Therefore, the blinking mode data is set in the predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2722). This process is completed. On the other hand, if the abnormality flag is not ON (NO in S2721), the output rate does not substantially exceed the specified value, so lighting mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2723). ), Finish this process. On the other hand, if the value of the fluctuation count counter is less than "3000" (NO in S2720), it is assumed that the output rate value has not yet converged, and the extinguishing mode data is stored in the predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84. Set (S2724) to finish this process.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the seventh form, when the accessory ratio actually exceeds 70% or the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, the special LED 350 blinks from the lighting mode or the extinguishing mode. Switch to the mode. Therefore, the person who confirms the output rate knows that the special LED 350 is in the blinking mode, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a failure or malfunction, or has been illegally modified. It is possible to judge visually immediately.

In particular, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the seventh aspect, it is possible to notify a substantial abnormality of the output rate by a simple method without calculating the output rate. That is, since the above-mentioned output rate calculation process (S117, see FIG. 47) is not executed, the division control process becomes unnecessary. Instead, when the total number of prize balls reaches a predetermined total number of judgment total prize balls, it is internally judged whether the number of bonus balls or the number of continuous prize balls exceeds the standard outlier. Just do it. As a result, for the game control microcomputer 81, it is possible to notify the abnormality of the output rate while avoiding complicated processing and an increase in the processing load due to division (calculation of the output rate) by software.

Then, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the seventh form, based on the idea that it is sufficient to notify the abnormality of the actual output rate by the special LED 350 without notifying the output rate as a numerical value, FIG. 99 shows. As shown, the output rate indicator 300 is not arranged on the main control board 80. That is, in terms of hardware, only one special LED 350 is mainly added on the main control board 80. Therefore, it is easy to solve the problem of securing space on the main control board 80, and it is possible to reduce the design change from the existing pachinko gaming machine and implement it at low cost. Since the other actions and effects of the seventh form are substantially the same as those of the first form described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification example of the 7th form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 as a modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 107. In the seventh embodiment, it is notified whether or not the output rate substantially exceeds the specified value (whether or not it is within the normal range) without calculating the output rate. On the other hand, in the modified example of the seventh form, it is notified whether or not the base is substantially within the normal range without calculating the base.

In the modified example of the seventh form, as in the seventh form described above, special LEDs (notifying means, abnormality notifying means, light emitting means) are arranged on the main control board 80 (see FIG. 99). The base display 300 is not arranged on the main control board 80, and the game control microcomputer 81 does not execute the base display process (S2340). Therefore, the drive circuit of the modified example of the seventh form has the same configuration as the existing drive circuit that displays the game information like the drive circuit 200F of the fourth form described above (see FIG. 86).

Here, a method of determining whether or not the base is out of the normal range (including whether or not it exceeds the normal upper limit value) will be described without calculating the base. For example, when the number of shot balls in the normal game state is 10,000 (the value of the normal number of shots counter is "100"), the fact that the normal base is out of the normal range means that the normal game state is out of the normal range. The total number of prize balls exceeds 3,900. Also, for example, when the number of fired balls in the time-saving state is 2500 (the value of the time-saving firing ball counter is "25"), the fact that the time-saving base is out of the normal range is the total in the time-saving state. The number of prize balls exceeds 2457. Also, for example, when the number of shot balls in the jackpot game state is 1000 (the value of the jackpot launch ball counter is "10"), the jackpot base is out of the normal range in the jackpot game state. The total number of prize balls in the game exceeds 8,000. In this way, the total number of prize balls when the number of shot balls in each game state is a predetermined number of determined shot balls (10000 shots, 2500 shots, 1000 shots, etc. described above) is the normal upper limit value (described above). By looking at whether or not the number exceeds 3900, 2457, 8000, etc.), it is possible to determine whether or not each base is out of the normal range at that time. Utilizing this point, in the modified example of the seventh form, it is determined whether or not each base is substantially out of the normal range only by determining the magnitude at a certain timing without sequentially calculating each base.

Further, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, it is not only seen whether the total number of prize balls when the number of shot balls in each game state is a predetermined number of determined shot balls exceeds the normal upper limit value. It is also possible to see whether or not it is smaller than the normal lower limit (see FIGS. 105 (A), (B), and (C)). For example, when the number of shot balls in the normal game state is 10,000, and the total number of prize balls in the normal game state is smaller than 3000, it is determined that the ball is out of the normal range. Further, for example, when the number of shot balls in the time-saving state is 2500, if the total number of prize balls in the time-saving state is smaller than 2100, it is determined that the ball is out of the normal range. Further, for example, when the number of shot balls in the jackpot game state is 1000, if the total number of prize balls in the jackpot game state is smaller than 6000, it is determined that the ball is out of the normal range.

Thus, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, the ROM 83 of the game control microcomputer 81 has the normal simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105 (A), the time saving simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105 (B), and FIG. 105 (C). ) Shows the jackpot simple abnormality judgment table. As shown in FIG. 105 (A), in the normal simple abnormality judgment table, the value of the number of judgment firing balls that becomes the judgment timing in the normal game state and whether or not the normal base is within the normal range at the judgment timing. The value of the total number of prize balls (normal lower limit value, normal upper limit value) for judging is shown. Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the time saving simple abnormality judgment table shows the value of the number of judgment firing balls that becomes the judgment timing in the time saving state, and whether or not the time saving base is within the normal range at the judgment timing. The value of the total number of prize balls (normal lower limit value, normal upper limit value) for judging is shown. Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), the jackpot simple abnormality determination table shows the value of the number of determined launch balls that becomes the determination timing in the jackpot game state, and whether or not the jackpot base is within the normal range at the determination timing. The value of the total number of prize balls (normal lower limit value, normal upper limit value) for judging whether or not is shown.

With reference to these simple abnormality determination tables, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of fired balls in each game state has reached the determined number of fired balls. Then, if the number of determined launch balls has been reached, it is determined whether or not the normal upper limit value is exceeded and whether or not the determination launch ball number is smaller than the normal lower limit value. As a result, if it exceeds the normal upper limit value or is smaller than the normal lower limit value, the base is out of the normal range, and the mode of the special LED 350 is changed to the blinking mode. On the other hand, if it is equal to or less than the normal upper limit value and equal to or more than the normal lower limit value, the base is within the normal range, and the mode of the special LED 350 is changed to the lighting mode. In the modified example of the seventh form, as in the seventh form described above, it is assumed that the base value has not substantially converged until the number of fluctuations reaches 3000, and the mode of the special LED 350 is changed to the extinguishing mode. To do.

[Input processing] In the output processing (S101) of the modified example of the seventh form shown in FIG. 106, steps S115, S116, S118, S152 to S157 of the input processing (S101) of the modified example of the first form shown in FIG. Instead, step S191 is provided. As shown in FIG. 106, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the counter addition process (see FIG. 67) in step S151, and then executes the simple abnormality determination process described later (S191).

[Simple Abnormality Judgment Processing] As shown in FIG. 107, in the simple abnormality determination processing (S191), first, the simple abnormality determination table according to the game state is referred to (S192). That is, in the normal gaming state, the normal simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105 (A) is referred to. If the time is shortened, the time saving simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105 (B) is referred to. If it is in the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105 (C) is referred to. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of determined firing balls shown in the referenced simple abnormality determination table has been reached (S193). For example, when referring to the normal simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105 (A), whether or not the value of the normal launch ball counter is "100" (the number of launch balls in the normal game state is 10,000). To judge. If it is not the number of determined launch balls (NO in S193), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is the number of determined firing balls (YES in S193), the total number of prize balls in the corresponding gaming state is equal to or less than the normal upper limit value and equal to or more than the normal lower limit value shown in the reference simple abnormality determination table. It is determined whether or not (S194). For example, referring to the normal simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105 (A), when the value of the normal launch ball counter is "100", is the value of the normal total prize ball counter 3900 or less? It is determined whether or not it is, and whether or not it is 3000 or more. If the determination result in step S194 is NO, the abnormality flag is turned ON (S195), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S194 is YES, the abnormality flag is turned off (S196), and this process ends.

Since the output process (S107) of the modified example of the seventh form is the same as the output process (S107, see FIG. 103) of the seventh form described above, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the special LED processing (S2330) of the modified example of the seventh form is the same as the special LED processing (S2330, see FIG. 104) of the seventh form described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, according to the modified example of the seventh embodiment, when the base is substantially out of the normal range, the special LED 350 switches from the lighting mode (or the extinguishing mode) to the blinking mode. Therefore, the person who confirms the base knows that the special LED 350 is in the blinking mode, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a failure or malfunction, or has been illegally modified. It is possible to make a visual judgment immediately. In particular, according to the modified example of the seventh embodiment, it is possible to notify a substantial abnormality of the base by a simple method without calculating the base. Therefore, for the game control microcomputer 81, it is possible to notify the abnormality of the base while avoiding the complicated processing and the increase of the processing load due to the division (calculation of the base) by software. Since the action and effect of the other modified examples are only changed based on the output rate with respect to the action and effect of the seventh form described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<8th form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the eighth form will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112. In the first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80 performs a prize ball counter addition process (S114, see FIG. 46) for measuring the total number of prize balls and the number of bonus balls operated by the accessory. The output rate calculation process (S117, see FIG. 47) for calculating the output rate was executed. On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 116 of the payout control board (specific control board) 110 performs the prize ball counter addition process (S5104, see FIG. 112) and the payout rate calculation process (S5105, FIG. 112). (See) is now executed. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

In the eighth embodiment, when the main control board 80 inputs the winning detection signal, the winning ball command (winning information) is output to the payout control board 110. As a result, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls for operating the accessory based on the input prize ball command, and further calculates the payout rate. Then, the payout control board 110 outputs a payout rate calculation command including information on the calculated payout rate (feature ratio, continuous bonus ratio) to the main control board 80. As a result, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) can display the output rate on the output rate display 300 based on the input rate calculation command.

As shown in FIG. 108, the main control board 80 includes a special memory 89, and the payout control board 110 includes a special memory 189 for payout. As described above, the special memory 89 retains its own stored contents even if the stored contents of the gaming RAM 84 are erased when the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on. .. Further, the payout special memory 189 also retains its own stored contents even if the stored contents of the RAM 119 are erased when the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on. Although the special memory 189 for payout is a volatile storage means (DRAM), it may be configured by a non-volatile storage means (EEPROM, flash, or the like).

As shown in FIG. 109 (B), the special memory 89 of the eighth form includes a fluctuation number counter, a bonus ratio storage area, a continuous bonus ratio storage area, and a checksum storage area. Unlike the special memory 89 of the form (see FIG. 11C), it does not have a counter for 100 balls, an actual total number of prize balls counter, a bonus ball number counter, and a continuous bonus ball number counter. .. Instead, as shown in FIG. 109 (C), the payout special memory 189 of the eighth form includes a counter for 100 balls, a counter for the actual total number of prize balls, a counter for the number of prize balls, and a continuous character. It is equipped with a prize ball counter. The prize ball counter addition table shown in FIG. 109 (A) is stored in the ROM 83 of the game control microcomputer 81, but the prize ball counter shown in FIG. 109 (A) is also stored in the ROM 118 of the payout control microcomputer 116. The addition table may be stored.

[Input Processing] In the eighth form of input processing (S101) shown in FIG. 110, steps S123, S140 to S142 are performed instead of steps S113, S115 to S117 of the first form of input processing (S101) shown in FIG. 45. It is provided. As shown in FIG. 110, when the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S123, the game control microcomputer 81 generates a prize ball command including information capable of determining which winning opening the game ball has won based on the winning detection signal. The prize ball command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 84. In the past, the prize ball command included only information on the number of prize balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by including the information that can determine which winning opening is won in the prize ball command, the payout control board 110 determines the number of prize balls for operating the accessory based on the input prize ball command as described later. It becomes possible to measure. If it is possible to determine which winning opening is actually won only by the information on the number of prize balls, the prize ball command may include only the information on the number of prize balls as in the conventional case.

In the input process (S101), when the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S140, it determines whether or not the payout control board 110 has received the payout rate calculation command. If it has not been received (NO in S140), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is received (YES in S140), the information of the accessory ratio included in the output rate calculation command is analyzed, and the value of the accessory ratio is stored in the accessory ratio storage area of the special memory 89 (S141). ). Subsequently, the information of the continuous bonus ratio included in the output rate calculation command is analyzed, the value of the continuous bonus ratio is stored in the continuous bonus ratio storage area of the special memory 89 (S142), and this processing is completed. .. In this way, in the eighth embodiment, the display condition that the game machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301) and waiting for customers (YES in S2302) is satisfied by the output process (S107) shown in FIG. For example, the output rate display process (S2304) is executed. At this time, as described above, the value of the bonus ratio stored in the bonus ratio storage area or the value of the continuous bonus ratio stored in the continuous bonus ratio storage area is displayed on the output rate display 300. ing.

[Payout side timer interrupt processing] The payout side timer interrupt processing is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a period of several msec (for example, 4 msec) is input to the payout control board 110. As shown in FIG. 111, the payout control microcomputer 116 first executes an input process described later (S5001). Next, the prize ball motor control process for driving the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 is executed based on the information included in the prize ball command input from the main control board 80 (S5002). Next, based on the signal input from the card unit 135, the ball lending motor control process for driving the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 is executed (S5003). Then, output processing is executed (S5004). In the output process (S5004), a command (output calculation command, etc.) set in the output buffer of the RAM 119 is output to the main control board 80, and a signal for driving the launch motor 113 of the launch device 112 is output as a launch control circuit. Output to 111. Then, other processing is executed (S5005) to end this processing.

[Input Processing] As shown in FIG. 112, in the input processing (S5001), the payout control microcomputer 116 first determines whether or not a prize ball command has been received. If not received (NO in S5101), the process proceeds to step S5107. On the other hand, if it is received (YES in S5101), the information contained in the prize ball command (information on the number of prize balls, information that can determine which winning opening is won) is analyzed (S5102). Next, based on the analysis result of the prize ball command, the prize ball number setting process for setting the number of prize balls to be paid out is executed (S5103). Subsequently, based on the analysis result of the prize ball command, the same prize ball counter addition process as the prize ball counter addition process (S114, see FIG. 46) described in the first embodiment is executed (S5104). That is, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of prize balls and the number of prizes for operating the accessory. Next, based on the result of the prize ball counter addition processing (S5104), the same output rate calculation process as the output rate calculation process (S117, see FIG. 47) described in the first embodiment is executed (S5105). That is, the payout control board 110 calculates the payout rate (role ratio, continuous accessory ratio). Then, the output rate calculation command including the calculated output rate information is set in the output buffer of the RAM 119 (S5106), and the process proceeds to step S5107.

In step S5107, it is determined whether or not the prize ball detection signal is received from the prize ball sensor 122. If it has been received (YES in S5107), the prize ball measurement process for actually measuring the number of prize balls actually paid out is executed (S5108). Next, it is determined whether or not a ball rental information signal has been received from the card unit 135 (S5109). If it has been received (YES in S5109), the number of rented balls is set based on the information contained in the rented ball information signal (S5110). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the ball lending detection signal is received from the ball lending sensor 132. If it has been received (YES in S5111), the ball lending measurement process for measuring the number of balls actually rented is executed (S5112). After that, other processing is executed (S5113) to end this processing.

As another process (S5113), for example, if a RAM clear notification command is received from the main control board 80, the stored contents of the RAM 119 of the payout control board 110 are erased. However, even at this time, the value of the counter for 100 balls provided in the special memory 189 for payout of the payout control board 110, the value of the actual total prize ball counter, the value of the prize ball counter, and the continuous combination. The value of the prize ball counter is not cleared. Therefore, in the eighth form, even if the payout control board 110 is made to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls for the accessory operation and calculate the payout rate, the payout rate as a converged value is calculated as in the first form. It is possible to make it.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the eighth form, it is possible to confirm the output rate by displaying the output rate on the output rate display 300. Further, the payout control board 110, which is different from the main control board 80, measures the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls for operating the prize (the number of prize balls for the prize, continuous) based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 80. It is possible to measure the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to display the output rate without imposing a processing load on the main control board 80. In particular, the total number of prize balls is measured on the payout control board 110 simply by including information that can determine which winning opening the game ball has won in the prize ball command transmitted by the main control board 80. It is possible to measure the number of prize balls for the accessory operation. That is, by adding information using the existing signal line for transmitting the prize ball command, it is not necessary for the main control board 80 to perform the measurement process, and the burden on the main control board 80 is reduced by a simple method. It is possible.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the eighth form, the payout control board 110 is made to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of prizes for operating the accessory, and also to calculate the payout rate. Then, the main control board 80 can display the payout rate on the payout rate display 300 based on the payout rate information included in the payout rate calculation command from the payout control board 110. In this way, it is possible to display the output rate without imposing not only the processing load of the measurement but also the processing load of the calculation of the output rate on the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81). Since the other actions and effects of the eighth form are substantially the same as the above-mentioned actions and effects of the first form, the description thereof will be omitted.

<First modification of the eighth form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first modification of the eighth form will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115. As shown in FIG. 113, in this first modification, the payout rate indicator 300 is arranged not on the main control board 80 but on the payout control board 110. Then, as in the eighth embodiment described above, the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116) is made to measure the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls for the accessory operation, and the payout rate. Is also displayed. Specifically, in the output process (S5004) of the payout side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 111, the output rate display process (S2304) as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 can be executed.

In this first modification, as shown in FIG. 114, since the output rate indicator is not arranged on the main control board 80, the drive circuit 200F of the main control board 80 is the drive circuit 200F of the fourth form described above. As shown in (see FIG. 86), it has the same configuration as an existing drive circuit that displays game information. Further, the payout control board 110 is provided with a dedicated drive circuit 200G for displaying the payout rate on the payout rate display 300. As shown in FIG. 115, the drive circuit 200G includes a lighting selection circuit unit 230G and a lighting drive circuit unit 240G, and is connected to a payout rate indicator 300 arranged on the payout control board 110. Since the lighting selection circuit unit 230G has the same configuration as the light emission selection circuit unit 210 (see FIG. 15) described above, and the lighting drive circuit unit 240G has the same configuration as the light emission drive circuit unit 220 (see FIG. 15) described above. , The description is omitted.

As described above, according to the first modification of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 is made to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of prizes for operating the accessory, and also to calculate and display the payout rate. .. Therefore, it is possible to display the output rate on the output rate display 300 without imposing not only the processing load of measurement but also the processing load of calculation and display of output rate on the main control board (game control microcomputer 81). is there. Since it is not necessary to provide the output rate indicator 300 and the circuit unit for displaying the output rate on the main control board 80, it is possible to carry out the main control board with almost no design change. is there.

In the eighth embodiment and the first modification thereof, the payout control board 110 is made to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls for operating the accessory, and also to calculate the payout rate. However, it may be changed as follows. That is, the payout control board 110 is made to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls for operating the accessory, and is not allowed to calculate the payout rate. Instead, the payout control board 110 receives the measured total number of prize balls information (value of the actual total prize ball counter) and information on the number of bonus balls (value of the bonus ball counter and continuous bonus). A command including (value of the prize ball counter) is output to the main control board 80 by the output process (S5004, see FIG. 111) of the payout side timer interrupt process. As a result, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) executes the payout rate calculation process (S117, see FIG. 47) based on the above command input from the payout control board 110, and calculates the payout rate. .. Then, the calculated output rate may be displayed on the output rate display 300 on the main control board 80 by executing the output rate display process (see S2304, FIGS. 54 and 55). In this way, it is possible to distribute the processing load of measurement and the processing load of calculation and display of the output rate to the payout control board 110 and the main control board 80.

<Second modification of the eighth form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second modification of the eighth form will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 118. In the eighth embodiment and the first modification thereof, the game control microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80 is made to count the measured values (total number of prize balls and number of prizes for operating the accessory) for calculating the output rate. On the other hand, in the second modification of the eighth form, the payout control microcomputer 116 of the payout control board 110 is made to count the measured values (total number of launched balls and total number of prize balls) for calculating the base. It has become. In the second modification of the eighth embodiment, the base display 300 is arranged on the main control board 80.

In this second modification, when the main control board 80 inputs an entry detection signal (including a detection signal by the out port sensor 16a), a prize ball command is output to the payout control board 110. However, when the main control board 80 inputs the detection signal by the out port sensor 16a as the ball entry detection signal, the prize ball command including the information that the prize ball is "0" is output to the payout control board 110. In this way, the payout control board 110 measures (counts) the total number of launched balls and the total number of prize balls based on the input prize ball command, and further performs a base calculation. Then, the payout control board 110 outputs a base calculation command including information on the calculated base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base) to the main control board 80. As a result, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) can display the base on the base display 300 based on the input base calculation command.

In this second modification, as in the eighth embodiment, the main control board 80 is provided with the special memory 89, and the payout control board 110 is provided with the payout special memory 189 (see FIG. 108). As shown in FIG. 116 (B), the special memory 89 of the second modification includes a normal base storage area, a time saving base storage area, a jackpot base storage area, a fluctuation count counter, and a checksum storage area. .. However, unlike the special memory of the modified example of the first form (see FIG. 65C), the counter for the normal 100 balls, the counter for the number of normal launch balls, the counter for the normal total number of prize balls, and the counter for the time saving 100 balls , The time-saving launch ball number counter, the time-saving total prize ball number counter, the jackpot 100 ball counter, the jackpot launch ball number counter, and the jackpot total prize ball number counter are not provided. Instead, these counters are provided in the payout special memory 189, as shown in FIG. 116 (C). The prize ball counter addition table shown in FIG. 116 (A) is stored in the ROM 83 of the game control microcomputer 81, but the prize ball counter shown in FIG. 116 (A) is also stored in the ROM 118 of the payout control microcomputer 116. The addition table may be stored.

[Input processing] The input processing (S101) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 in the second modification will be described. In the input process (S101) of the second modification shown in FIG. 117, instead of the steps S112, S113, S115, S116, S151, S152 of the input process (S101) of the first modification shown in FIG. S220 to S223 are provided. As shown in FIG. 117, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the ball entry detection signal has been received in step S150, it refers to the prize ball counter addition table shown in FIG. 116 (A) (S220). Then, based on the received ball entry detection signal and the prize ball counter addition table, a prize ball command including information capable of determining which entry port the game ball has entered is generated, and the prize ball command is generated. Is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 84 (S221). At this time, for example, if the detection signal (ball entry detection signal) by the out port sensor 16a is received, the ball entry and the prize ball by the out port 16 are based on the prize ball counter addition table shown in FIG. 116 (A). A prize ball command including information whose number is "0" is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 84. As described in the eighth embodiment described above, the prize ball command may include only the information on the number of prize balls.

When the process proceeds to step S222 in the input process (S101), it is determined whether or not the base calculation command is received from the payout control board 110. If it has not been received (NO in S222), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is received (YES in S222), the base information included in the base calculation command is analyzed, the base value is stored in the storage area of the corresponding special memory 89 (S223), and this processing is completed. .. That is, if the base operation command contains the normal base information, the normal base value is stored in the normal base storage area, and if the base operation command contains the time saving base information, the time saving base is stored. The value is stored in the time-saving base storage area, and if the base operation command contains jackpot-based information, the jackpot-based value is stored in the jackpot-based storage area. In this way, in the second modification of the eighth form, the display condition that the game machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301) and waiting for customers (YES in S2302) by the output process (S107) shown in FIG. If is satisfied, the base display process (S2340) is executed. At this time, as described in the modified example of the first form, the normal base value stored in the normal base storage area, the time saving base value stored in the time saving base storage area, or the jackpot base stored in the jackpot base storage area. The value is displayed on the base display 300.

[Input processing] The input processing (S5001) executed by the payout control microcomputer 116 in the second modification will be described. In the input process (S101) of the second modification shown in FIG. 118, steps S5201 to S5206 are provided instead of steps S5101 to S5106 of the input process (S5101) of the eighth form shown in FIG. 112. As shown in FIG. 118, in the input process (S5001), the payout control microcomputer 116 first determines whether or not the prize ball command is received. If not received (NO in S5201), proceed to step S5107. On the other hand, if it is received (YES in S5201), the information contained in the prize ball command (information on the number of prize balls, information that can determine which entry port the ball entered) is analyzed (S5202). .. Next, the prize ball number setting process for setting the prize ball number is executed based on the analysis result of the prize ball command (S5203). At this time, for example, if the entry into the out port 16 is analyzed, the number of prize balls is set to "0" in the prize ball number setting process (S5203). Subsequently, based on the analysis result of the prize ball command, the same prize ball counter addition process as the counter addition process (S151, see FIG. 67) described in the modified example of the first form is executed (S5204). That is, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of launched balls and the total number of prize balls. Next, based on the result of the counter addition processing (S5204), the same base calculation processing as the base calculation processing (S152, see FIG. 68) described in the modified example of the first embodiment is executed (S5205). That is, the payout control board 110 performs base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base) calculation. Then, the base calculation command including the calculated base information is set in the output buffer of the RAM 119 (S5206), and the process proceeds to step S5107.

As described above, according to the second modification of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 different from the main control board 80 measures the total number of launched balls and the total prize based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 80. It is possible to measure the number of balls. Therefore, it is possible to display the base without imposing a processing load on the main control board 80. In particular, the total number of launched balls is simply included in the payout control board 110 by simply including information that can determine which entry port the game ball has entered in the prize ball command transmitted by the main control board 80. It is possible to measure the total number of prize balls.

Further, according to the second modification of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 is made to measure the total number of launched balls and the total number of prize balls, and also to perform the base calculation. Then, the main control board 80 can display the base on the base display 300 based on the base information included in the base calculation command from the payout control board 110. In this way, it is possible to display the base without imposing not only the processing load of measurement but also the processing load of calculation of the base on the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81). Since the action and effect of the other second modification is only changed based on the output rate with respect to the action and effect of the eighth form described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Third modification of the eighth form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third modification of the eighth form will be described. In this third modification, the base display 300 is arranged not on the main control board 80 but on the payout control board 110 (see FIG. 113). Then, as in the second modification of the eighth form described above, the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116) is made to measure the total number of launched balls, the total number of prize balls, and the base calculation. The base is also displayed. Specifically, the output process (S5004) of the payout side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 111 can execute the base display process (S2340) as shown in FIGS. 70 to 73.

In this third modification, since the base display is not arranged on the main control board 80, the drive circuit 200F of the main control board 80 is like the drive circuit 200F of the fourth form described above (see FIG. 86). , It has the same configuration as the existing drive circuit that displays game information. Further, the payout control board 110 is provided with a dedicated drive circuit for displaying the base on the base display 300. Since this drive circuit is connected to the base display 300 arranged on the payout control board 110 and has almost the same configuration as the drive circuit 200F shown in FIG. 86, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, according to the third modification of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 is made to measure the total number of launched balls and the total number of prize balls, and also to perform the calculation and display of the base. Therefore, it is possible to display the base on the base display 300 without imposing not only the processing load of measurement but also the processing load of calculation and display of the base on the main control board (game control microcomputer 81). Since it is not necessary to provide the base display 300 and the circuit unit for displaying the base on the main control board 80, it is possible to carry out the main control board with almost no design change.

In the second modification and the third modification of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 is made to measure the total number of launched balls and the total number of prize balls, and also to perform the base calculation. However, it may be changed as follows. That is, the payout control board 110 is made to measure the total number of launched balls and the total number of prize balls, and is not allowed to perform the base calculation. Instead, the payout control board 110 provides the measured total number of launched balls (the sum of the value of the normal launch ball counter, the value of the time-saving launch ball counter, and the value of the jackpot launch ball counter) and the total number of prize balls. The command including the information (the sum of the value of the normal total prize ball counter, the value of the time saving total prize ball counter, and the value of the jackpot total prize ball counter) is output from the payout side timer interrupt process (S5004, Fig. (Refer to 111), the output is output to the main control board 80. As a result, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) executes the base calculation process (S152, see FIG. 68) based on the above command input from the payout control board 110, and calculates the base. Then, by executing the base display process (S2340, see FIGS. 70 to 73), the calculated base may be displayed on the base display 300 on the main control board 80. In this way, the processing load of measurement and the processing load of base calculation and display can be distributed to the payout control board 110 and the main control board 80.

<9th form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the ninth form will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 122. In the drive circuit 200 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, a lighting selection circuit unit 230 is provided, and the common signal lines B1 to B4 of the output rate display 300 are connected to the lighting selection circuit unit 230. On the other hand, in the drive circuit 200A of the ninth form, as shown in FIG. 119, each common signal line B1 to B4 of the output rate display 300 is connected to the light emission selection circuit unit without providing the lighting selection circuit unit 230. I am trying to connect to 210A. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 119, in the drive circuit 200A of the ninth form, the bus line BL is connected to the input terminals 1D to 8D of the IC1, and the data information D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6 D7 is input respectively. Further, the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of the IC1 are connected to the input terminals IN to IN4 of the IC2 via four signal transmission lines S1 as in the first mode described above, and further, the output terminals 5Q to 8Q of the IC1 are further connected. Are connected to the input terminals IN5 to IN8 of the IC2 via four signal transmission lines S4, respectively. Then, each common signal line (each lighting common line) B1 to B4 of the output rate display 300 is connected to the output terminals O5 to O8 of the IC2. The first common signal line B1 connected to the output terminal O5 of the IC2 corresponds to the "first lighting common line", and the second common signal line B2 connected to the output terminal O6 of the IC2 is "second lighting". Corresponds to "common line".

In this way, in the drive circuit 200A of the ninth form, the input terminals 5D to 8D and the output terminals 5Q to 8Q of the IC1 and the input terminals IN5 to IN8 and the output terminals O5 to O8 of the IC2 in the light emission selection circuit unit 210 of the first form are connected. I have decided to use it effectively. As a result, the light emitting selection circuit unit 210A of the ninth form can select a light emitting region capable of emitting light from the four light emitting regions 410 to 440 of the game display 40, and the four lighting areas 310 to the output rate display 300. It is possible to select a lighting area that can be lit out of 340.

[Game Display Process] In the game display process (S2303) of the ninth form shown in FIG. 120, step S2441 is replaced with steps S2404, S2412, S2420, S2427 of the game display process (S2303) of the first form shown in FIG. 53. , S2442, S2443, S2444 are provided. As shown in FIG. 120, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 ... 7] = D [10000000] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 after executing step S2403 (S2441). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2405). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the first light emitting region 410. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 ... 7] = D [01000000] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 after executing step S2411 (S2442). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2413). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the second light emitting region 420.

Further, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 ... 7] = D [00100000] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 after executing step S2419 (S2443). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2421). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the third light emitting region 430. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 ... 7] = D [00010000] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 after executing step S2426 (S2444). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2428). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the fourth light emitting region 440.

[Output rate display process] In the ninth form output rate display process (S2304) shown in FIG. 121, instead of steps S2504, S2505, S2514, S2515 of the first form output rate display process (S2304) shown in FIG. 54. , Steps S2550, S2551, S2552, S2553 are provided. As shown in FIG. 121, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 ... 7] = D [00001000] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 after executing step S2503 (S2550). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2551). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the first lighting area 310. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 ... 7] = D [00000100] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 after executing step S2513 (S2552). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2553). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the second lighting area 320.

In the ninth mode output rate display process (S2304) shown in FIG. 122, steps S2554, S2555, instead of steps S2524, S2525, S2533, S2534 of the first form output rate display process (S2304) shown in FIG. 55. S2556 and S2557 are provided. As shown in FIG. 122, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 ... 7] = D [000000010] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 after executing step S2523 (S2554). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2555). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the third lighting area 330. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 ... 7] = D [00000001] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 after executing step S2532 (S2556). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2557). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the fourth lighting area 340.

In the ninth embodiment, the data information D [10000000], the data information D [01000000], the data information D [00100000], and the data information D [00010000] that the game control microcomputer 81 outputs to the light emission selection circuit unit 210A are the first. Corresponds to one signal. Further, the data information D [00001000], the data information D [0000100], the data information D [00000010], and the data information D [00000001] output by the game control microcomputer 81 to the light emission selection circuit unit 210A correspond to the second signal. .. Further, the state in which the light emitting region capable of emitting light by the first signal is selected corresponds to the game display state. Further, the state in which the lighting area that can be lit by the second signal is selected corresponds to the output rate display state (specific display state).

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the ninth form, when the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the first signal to the light emission selection circuit unit 210A (IC1) by the drive circuit 200A shown in FIG. 119, the game display state is set. Therefore, it is possible to display the game information related to the progress of the game on the game display 40. On the other hand, if the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the second signal to the light emission selection circuit unit 210A, the output rate display state is set and the output rate can be displayed on the output rate display 300. In this way, while utilizing the existing light emission selection circuit unit (IC1, IC2) and light emission drive circuit unit (IC3, IC4) for displaying on the game display 40, the software control output by the game control microcomputer 81 It is possible to selectively display the game information and the output rate by switching between. That is, as in the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, the output rate display 300 has a simple circuit configuration without newly adding the lighting selection circuit unit 210X and the lighting drive circuit unit 220X for displaying the output rate. It is possible to display the output rate. In short, since there is no IC to be newly added to the existing drive circuit, the drive circuit 200A of the ninth form can be easily mounted on the main control board 80. Since the other actions and effects of the ninth form are substantially the same as the above-mentioned actions and effects of the first form, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Modified example of the ninth form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modified example of the ninth form will be described. In the ninth aspect, the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the first form is replaced with the drive circuit 200A (see FIG. 119), and the output rate is displayed on the output rate display 300. On the other hand, in the modified example of the ninth form, the drive circuit 200 of the modified example of the first form is replaced with the drive circuit 200A, and the base is displayed on the base display 300. Since the action and effect of the modified example in this case is only changed based on the output rate with respect to the action and effect of the ninth form described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<10th form>
The tenth form of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125. In the drive circuit 200 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, a lighting selection circuit unit 230 is provided, and the common signal lines B1 to B4 of the output rate display 300 are connected to the lighting selection circuit unit 230. On the other hand, in the drive circuit 200B of the tenth form, as shown in FIG. 123, the common signal lines B1 to B4 of the output rate display 300 are emitted with the connector CN2 without providing the lighting selection circuit unit 230. It is provided as a branch from each common signal line A1 to A4 between the selection circuit unit 210. The first common signal line B1 branching from the first common signal line (first light emitting common line) A1 corresponds to the "first branch common line", and from the second common signal line (second light emitting common line) A2. The branching second common signal line B2 corresponds to the "second branch common line". Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

In the drive circuit 200B of the tenth form, the light emitting selection circuit unit 210 can select a light emitting region capable of emitting light from the four light emitting regions 410 to 440 of the game display 40, and the four lighting areas of the output rate display 300. It is possible to select a lighting area that can be lit from 310 to 340. However, the signals (common signals) output from the output terminals O1 to O4 of the IC2 are transmitted to the light emitting regions 410 to 440 of the game display 40 via the common signal lines A1 to A4, and the common signals are also transmitted. It is transmitted to each of the lighting areas 310 to 340 of the output rate display 300 via the lines B1 to B4. Therefore, the lighting area is selected at the same time as the light emitting area is selected, and the light emitting area is also selected at the same time as the lighting area is selected.

Further, as in the first embodiment, the data signal lines Ba to Bh of the output rate display 300 are branched from the data signal lines Aa to Ah between the connector CN2 and the light emitting drive circuit unit 220, respectively. .. Therefore, when the game information is displayed on the game display 40, the light emitting mode on the game display 40 is reflected as it is on the output rate display 300, and when the output rate is displayed on the output rate display 300, the output rate is displayed. The lighting mode of the output rate display 300 will be reflected as it is on the game display 40.

[Output rate display process] In the output rate display process (S2304) of the tenth form shown in FIG. 124, step S2560, instead of steps S2505 and S2515 of the output rate display process (S2304) of the first form shown in FIG. S2561 is provided. As shown in FIG. 124, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [1000] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2504, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to "H" level (S2560). As a result, the lighting area that can be lit is selected as the first lighting area 310, but the first light emitting area 410 is also selected. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0100] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2514, and then switches the output level of the select signal XCSE0 to the "H" level. (S2561). As a result, the lighting area that can be lit is selected as the second lighting area 320, but the second light emitting area 420 is also selected.

In the output rate display process (S2304) of the tenth form shown in FIG. 125, steps S2562 and S2563 are provided in place of steps S2525 and S2534 of the output rate display process (S2304) of the first form shown in FIG. 55. .. As shown in FIG. 125, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0010] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2524, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to "H" level (S2562). As a result, the lighting area that can be lit is selected as the third lighting area 330, but the third light emitting area 430 is also selected. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0001] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2533, and then switches the output level of the select signal XCSE0 to the "H" level. (S2563). As a result, the lighting area that can be lit is selected as the fourth lighting area 340, but the fourth light emitting area 440 is also selected.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the tenth form, if the game control microcomputer 81 executes the game display process (S2303) shown in FIG. 53, the output rate display 300 displays meaninglessly. It is possible to display the game information related to the progress of the game on the game display 40. Further, if the game control microcomputer 81 executes the output rate display process (S2304) shown in FIGS. 124 and 125, the game display 40 displays a meaningless display, but the output rate display 300 displays the output rate. It is possible to do.

Then, according to the drive circuit 200B of the tenth form, the existing light emission selection circuit unit (IC1, IC2) and the light emission drive circuit unit (IC3,) for displaying on the game display 40, as in the ninth form described above While using the IC4), it is possible to selectively display the game information and the output rate by switching the control output in a software manner by the game control microcomputer 81. That is, as in the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, the output rate display 300 has a simple circuit configuration without newly adding the lighting selection circuit unit 210X and the lighting drive circuit unit 220X for displaying the output rate. It is possible to display the output rate.

Here, in the tenth form, as described above, the light emitting mode when displaying the game information on the game display 40 is reflected on the output rate display 300, and the lighting mode when displaying the output rate on the output rate display 300. Is reflected in the game display 40, but this is not a problem. That is, as described in the first embodiment, the display condition for displaying the output rate on the output rate display 300 is that the game machine frame 50 is open and is in a customer waiting state. Therefore, during the game by the player, since the game machine frame 50 is normally closed, the game information is displayed on the game display 40. At this time, even if the light emitting mode of the game display 40 is reflected in the output rate display 300, there is no problem because the output rate display 300 cannot be visually recognized. On the other hand, when the game machine frame 50 is opened to check the output rate, the customer is in a waiting state. At this time, even if the lighting mode of the output rate display 300 is reflected in the game display 40, there is no problem because the game is not performed. Since the other actions and effects of the tenth form are substantially the same as the above-mentioned actions and effects of the first form, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification example of the tenth form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 as a modified example of the tenth form will be described. In the tenth form, the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the first form is replaced with the drive circuit 200B (see FIG. 123), and the output rate is displayed on the output rate display 300. On the other hand, in the modified example of the tenth form, the drive circuit 200 of the modified example of the first form is replaced with the drive circuit 200B, and the base is displayed on the base display 300. Since the action and effect of the modified example in this case is only changed based on the output rate with respect to the action and effect of the tenth form described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<11th form>
The eleventh form of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128. In the drive circuit 200 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, each data signal line Ba to Bh of the output rate display 300 is connected to each data signal line Aa to between the connector CN2 and the light emitting drive circuit unit 220. It is branched from Ah. On the other hand, in the drive circuit 200C of the eleventh form, as shown in FIG. 126, a lighting drive circuit unit 240 is provided to light and drive each data signal line (data line) Ba to Bh of the output rate display 300. It is connected to the circuit unit 240. In the drive circuit 200C of the eleventh form, the lighting drive circuit unit 240 is provided instead of the lighting selection circuit unit 230 of the first form. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

In the drive circuit 200C of the eleventh form, as shown in FIG. 126, the common signal lines B1 to B4 of the output rate display 300 are the common signal lines A1 to A4 between the connector CN2 and the light emission selection circuit unit 210. It is provided by branching from. Therefore, the light emitting selection circuit unit 210 can select a light emitting region capable of emitting light from the four light emitting regions 410 to 440 of the game display 40, and can light the light emitting region of the output rate display 300 among the four lighting regions 310 to 340. The lighting area can be selected. The first common signal line B1 branched from the first common signal line (first light emitting common line) A1 corresponds to the "first branch common line", and from the second common signal line (second light emitting common line) A2. The branched second common signal line B2 corresponds to the "second branch common line".

Based on the data information D [0 ... 7], the lighting drive circuit unit 240 displays eight lighting units for output rate in the lighting region selected by the light emission selection circuit unit 210 among the four lighting regions 310 to 340. It is a circuit to enable lighting. The lighting drive circuit unit 240 includes a flip-flop (IC7) and a transistor array (IC8).

The IC 7 is a D-type flip-flop similar to the IC 3 of the light emitting drive circuit unit 220. A bus line BL is connected to the input terminals 1D to 8D of the IC7, and data information D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7 are input respectively. On the other hand, eight signal transmission lines S5 are connected to the output terminals 1Q to 8Q of the IC7, respectively. A reset signal RST may be input to the clear input terminal CLR of the IC7. Then, the select signal XCSE10 (see FIG. 14) from the game control microcomputer 81 is input to the clock input terminal CLK of the IC7.

The IC8 is a driver similar to the IC4 of the light emitting drive circuit unit 220. Eight signal transmission lines S5 are connected to the input terminals IN1 to IN8 of the IC8. On the other hand, the output terminals O1 to O8 of the IC8 are connected to the data signal lines Ba to Bh from the first data signal line Ba to the eighth data signal line Bh. These data signal lines Ba to Bh are respectively connected to eight output rate lighting units (see FIG. 13) of each lighting area 310 to 340 of the output rate display 300 via a current limiting resistor RC.

[Output rate display process] In the 11th form output rate display process (S2304) shown in FIG. 127, steps S2503, S2505, S2509, S2513, S2515, of the first form output rate display process (S2304) shown in FIG. 54. Steps S2570, S2571, S2572, S2573, S2574, S2575 are provided in place of S2519. As shown in FIG. 127, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 in step S2502, and then outputs the select signal XCSE10. Switch the level to the "H" level (S2570). As a result, the lighting state in the fourth lighting area 340 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Then, in step S2504, after the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [1000] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2571). As a result, the lighting area that can be lit is selected as the first lighting area 310, but the first light emitting area 410 is also selected. However, in the eleventh form, after executing step S2507 or S2508, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2572). As a result, the tens digit of the output rate (role ratio or continuous accessory ratio) is displayed in the selected first lighting area 310, and the lighting mode in the first lighting area 310 in the selected first light emitting area 410. Is not reflected.

Further, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 in step S2512, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to the "H" level. Switch to (S2573). As a result, the lighting state in the first lighting area 310 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Then, in step S2514, after the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0100] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2574). As a result, the lighting area that can be lit is selected as the second lighting area 320, but the second light emitting area 420 is also selected. However, in the eleventh form, after executing step S2517 or S2518, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2575). As a result, the first digit of the output rate is displayed in the selected second lighting area 320, and the lighting mode in the second lighting area 320 is not reflected in the selected second light emitting area 420.

In the eleventh form of the output rate display process (S2304) shown in FIG. 128, the step S2523, S2525, S2529, S2532, S2534, S2539 of the first form of the output rate display process (S2304) shown in FIG. S2576, S2577, S2578, S2579, S2580, S2581 are provided. As shown in FIG. 128, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 in step S2522, and then outputs the select signal XCSE10. Switch the level to the "H" level (S2576). As a result, the lighting state in the second lighting area 320 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Then, in step S2524, after the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0010] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2577). As a result, the lighting area that can be lit is selected as the third lighting area 330, but the third light emitting area 430 is also selected. However, in the eleventh form, after executing step S2527 or S2528, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2578). As a result, "1" or "2" is displayed in the selected third lighting area 330, and the lighting mode in the third lighting area 330 is not reflected in the selected third light emitting area 430.

Further, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 in step S2531, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to the "H" level. Switch to (S2579). As a result, the lighting state in the third lighting area 330 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Then, in step S2533, after the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0001] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2580). As a result, the lighting area that can be lit is selected as the fourth lighting area 340, but the fourth light emitting area 440 is also selected. However, in the eleventh form, after executing step S2536 or S2537, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2581). As a result, "0" or "1" is displayed in the selected fourth lighting area 340, and the lighting mode in the fourth lighting area 340 is not reflected in the selected fourth light emitting area 440.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the eleventh form, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the game display process (S2303) shown in FIG. 53, the game display 40 displays the game information related to the progress of the game. It is possible. Further, if the game control microcomputer 81 executes the output rate display process (S2304) shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the output rate display 300 can display the output rate. Then, according to the drive circuit 200C of the eleventh form, with respect to the existing light emission selection circuit unit 210 (IC1, IC2) and the light emission drive circuit unit 220 (IC3, IC4) for displaying on the game display 40. It can be configured only by adding the lighting drive circuit unit 240 (IC7, IC8). That is, as in the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, it is not necessary to newly add both the lighting selection circuit unit 210X and the lighting drive circuit unit 220X for displaying the output rate. In this way, according to the eleventh form, by switching the software control output by the game control microcomputer 81 and adding the lighting drive circuit unit 240, the display of the game information and the display of the output rate can be selected with a simple circuit configuration. It can be done uniformly. Since the other actions and effects of the eleventh form are substantially the same as the above-mentioned actions and effects of the first form, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification example of the eleventh form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 as a modified example of the eleventh form will be described. In the eleventh form, the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the first form is replaced with the drive circuit 200C (see FIG. 126), and the output rate is displayed on the output rate display 300. On the other hand, in the modified example of the eleventh form, the drive circuit 200 of the modified example of the first form is replaced with the drive circuit 200C, and the base is displayed on the base display 300. Since the action and effect of the modified example in this case is only changed based on the output rate with respect to the action and effect of the eleventh form described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<12th form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the twelfth form will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 133. In the drive circuit 200 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the lighting selection circuit unit 230 includes IC5 (flip-flop) and IC6 (transistor array) as integrated circuits. On the other hand, in the drive circuit 200D of the twelfth form, as shown in FIG. 129, the lighting selection circuit unit 250 is configured to include only the IC 6 as an integrated circuit. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

A signal transmission line S11 branched from a signal transmission line S1 connected to the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of the IC1 and the input terminals IN1 to IN4 of the IC2 is provided. The signal transmission line S11 is connected to the input terminals IN1 to IN4 of the IC6, respectively. Therefore, the IC2 can transmit a signal to the common signal lines A1 to A4 of the game display 40 based on the signal output from the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of the IC1, and the IC6 also outputs from the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of the IC1. A signal can be transmitted to the common signal lines B1 to B4 of the game display 40 based on the signal. However, in this case, if the signal transmission line S1 and the signal transmission line S11 are always in a conductive state, the light emitting mode when the game information is displayed on the game display 40 as in the tenth mode described above (see FIG. 123). Is reflected on the output rate display 300, and the lighting mode when displaying the output rate on the output rate display 300 is reflected on the game display 40. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the switch circuit unit 260 is provided in the signal transmission line S1 and the signal transmission line S11 in order to deal with the above-mentioned problem.

The switch circuit unit 260 can switch the signal transmission line S1 to a conductive state or a non-conducting state, and can switch the signal transmission line S11 to a conductive state or a non-conducting state. When the signal transmission line (first signal line) S1 is switched to the conductive state, the switch circuit unit 260 switches the signal transmission line (second signal line) S11 to the non-conducting state, and switches the signal transmission line S11 to the non-conducting state. When switching to the non-conducting state, the signal transmission line S1 is switched to the conducting state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130, the switch circuit unit 260 includes a first switch unit 261 on the signal transmission line S1 and a second switch unit 262 on the signal transmission line S11. The first switch unit 261 includes an N-type MOSFET (TR1) and a P-type MOSFET (TR11) that switch the connection state (whether connected or disconnected) between the output terminal 1Q of the IC1 and the input terminal IN1 of the IC2. , The connection state of the N-type MOSFET (TR2) and P-type MOSFET (TR12) that switches the connection state between the output terminal 2Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN2 of IC2, and the output terminal 3Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN3 of IC2. N-type MOSFET (TR3) and P-type MOSFET (TR13) that switch between, and N-type MOSFET (TR4) and P-type MOSFET (TR14) that switch the connection state between the output terminal 4Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN4 of IC2. ), A first inverter INV1 and a second inverter INV2.

Further, the second switch unit 262 includes an N-type MOSFET (TR5) and a P-type MOSFET (TR15) that switch the connection state between the output terminal 1Q of the IC1 and the input terminal IN1 of the IC6, and the output terminals 2Q and IC6 of the IC1. N-type MOSFET (TR6) and P-type MOSFET (TR16) that switch the connection state with the input terminal IN2, and N-type MOSFET (TR7) that switches the connection state between the output terminal 3Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN3 of IC6. And P-type MOSFET (TR17), N-type MOSFET (TR8) and P-type MOSFET (TR18) that switch the connection state between the output terminal 4Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN4 of IC6, and the third inverter INV3. I have.

Specifically, in the first switch section 261 and the second switch section 262, the drain terminals of the N-type MOSFETs (TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4, TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8) and the P-type MOSFETs (TR11, The source terminals of TR12, TR13, TR14, TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18) are connected, and the pull-up resistor Ra is connected to this side. On the opposite side, the source terminal of the N-type MOSFET and the drain terminal of the P-type MOSFET are connected.

In the first switch section 261, the level of the select signal XCSE10 is inverted twice by the first inverter INV1 and the second inverter INV2 at the gate terminals of the N-type MOSFETs (TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4). The signal is input. Further, in the first switch section 261, a signal at a level obtained by inverting the level of the select signal XCSE10 once by the first inverter INV1 is input to the gate terminal of the P-type MOSFET (TR11, TR12, TR13, TR14). ..

Further, in the second switch unit 262, a signal having the level of the select signal XCSE10 inverted once by the third inverter INV3 is input to the gate terminal of the N-type MOSFET (TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8). .. Further, in the second switch unit 262, the select signal XCSE10 is input to the gate terminals of the P-type MOSFETs (TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18) at the same level.

In this way, in the first switch section 261 and the second switch section 262, an "H" level signal is input to the gate terminals of the N-type MOSFETs (TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4, TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8). (That is, when the gate voltage (gate-source voltage) becomes "L" level (voltage higher than the upper threshold voltage)), P-type MOSFETs (TR11, TR12, TR13, TR14, TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18) When an "L" level signal is input to the gate terminal of) (that is, when the gate voltage becomes "L" level (voltage lower than the lower threshold voltage)), sufficient current is supplied between the drain and source of each MOSFET. Will flow. That is, the signal transmission line S1 or the signal transmission line S11 becomes conductive.

Conversely, an "L" level signal is input to the gate terminal of the N-type MOSFET (that is, when the gate voltage becomes "L" level), and an "H" level signal is input to the gate terminal of the P-type MOSFET. When a signal is input (ie, when the gate voltage reaches the "H" level), sufficient current does not flow between the drain and source of each MOSFET. That is, the signal transmission line S1 or the signal transmission line S11 is in a non-conducting state.

In this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 81 sets the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to the “H” level (first level), the first switch unit 261 has an N-type MOSFET (TR1, TR2, TR3). , TR4) is input with an "H" level signal, and P-type MOSFETs (TR11, TR12, TR13, TR14) are input with an "L" level signal, so that the signal transmission line S1 is in a conductive state. Become. At this time, in the second switch unit 262, an "L" level signal is input to the N-type MOSFETs (TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8) and the P-type MOSFETs (TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18). Since the "H" level signal is input to the signal transmission line S11, the signal transmission line S11 becomes non-conducting.

On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 81 sets the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to the “L” level (second level), the N-type MOSFET (TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4) in the first switch unit 261 ) Is input with an “L” level signal, and the P-type MOSFETs (TR11, TR12, TR13, TR14) are input with an “H” level signal, so that the signal transmission line S1 is in a non-conducting state. .. At this time, in the second switch unit 262, an "H" level signal is input to the N-type MOSFETs (TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8) and the P-type MOSFETs (TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18). Since the "L" level signal is input to the signal transmission line S11, the signal transmission line S11 becomes conductive.

In this way, in the drive circuit 200D of the twelfth form, the switch circuit unit 260 is composed of a combination of two MOSFETs of different types. Therefore, it is possible to increase the reliability of communication between the game control microcomputer 81 and the IC2 and IC6. That is, since the switch circuit unit 260 is configured by combining MOSFETs of both N-type and P-type, switching operation is possible in the range of 0V to Vcc. Therefore, it is easier to set the input voltage for the input terminals IN1 to IN4 of the IC2 and IC6 to a level at which normal operation is performed, as compared with the case where the switch circuit unit is composed of only one P-type or N-type MOSFET. It is possible.

[Output Process] In the output process (S107) of the twelfth form shown in FIG. 131, steps S2306 and S2307 are newly provided with respect to the output process (S107) of the first form shown in FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 131, in the game control microcomputer 81, if the game machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the output level of the select signal XCSE10 To the "H" level. As a result, the signal transmission line S1 becomes conductive, while the signal transmission line S11 becomes non-conductive. Then, the game display process is executed in order to display the game information on the game display 40 (S2303). On the other hand, in the game control microcomputer 81, if the game machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is set to "YES". Set to "L" level. As a result, the signal transmission line S1 becomes non-conducting, while the signal transmission line S11 becomes conductive. Then, in order to display the output rate on the output rate display 300, the output rate display process is executed (S2304).

[Output rate display process] In the output rate display process (S2304) of the twelfth form shown in FIG. 132, step S2590, instead of steps S2505 and S2515 of the output rate display process (S2304) of the first form shown in FIG. S2591 is provided. As shown in FIG. 132, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [1000] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2504, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to "H" level (S2590). At this time, although the signal transmission line S11 is in a conductive state, since the signal transmission line S1 is in a non-conducting state, the lighting area that can be lit is the first lighting area 310, and the first light emitting area 410 is not selected. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0100] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2514, and then switches the output level of the select signal XCSE0 to the "H" level. (S2591). At this time as well, although the signal transmission line S11 is in the conductive state, the signal transmission line S1 is in the non-conducting state, so that the lighting area that can be lit is the second lighting area 320, and the second light emitting area 420 is not selected.

In the output rate display process (S2304) of the twelfth form shown in FIG. 133, steps S2592 and S2593 are provided in place of steps S2525 and S2534 of the output rate display process (S2304) of the first form shown in FIG. 55. .. As shown in FIG. 133, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0010] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2524, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to "H" level (S2592). At this time, although the signal transmission line S11 is in the conductive state, since the signal transmission line S1 is in the non-conducting state, the lighting area that can be lit is the third lighting area 330, and the third light emitting area 430 is not selected. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0001] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2533, and then switches the output level of the select signal XCSE0 to the "H" level. (S2593). At this time as well, although the signal transmission line S11 is in the conductive state, the signal transmission line S1 is in the non-conducting state, so that the lighting region that can be lit is the fourth lighting region 340, and the fourth light emitting region 440 is not selected.

The game display process (S2303) of the twelfth form is the same as the game display process (S2303) of the first form shown in FIG. 53. However, when the game display process (S2303) of the twelfth form is executed, as described above, although the signal transmission line S1 is in the conductive state, the signal transmission line S11 is in the non-conducting state, so that the output rate display process described above is performed. Contrary to (S2304), each light emitting region 410 to 440 is selected, whereas each lighting region 310 to 340 is not selected.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the twelfth form, as shown in FIG. 129, the drive circuit 200D is provided with the switch circuit unit 260. As a result, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to the "H" level or the "L" level, so that the light emission selection circuit unit 210 selects a light emission region that can emit light. It is possible to switch to the output rate display state for selecting a lighting area in which the selection circuit unit 250 can be lit. That is, the switch circuit unit 260 can selectively display the display on the game display 40 and the display on the output rate display 300, and the game display 40 can be used as in the tenth form described above. It is possible to avoid that the light emitting mode is reflected on the output rate display 300 and that the lighting mode on the output rate display 300 is reflected on the game display 40. Since the other actions and effects of the twelfth form are substantially the same as the above-mentioned actions and effects of the first form, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Modified example of the twelfth form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 as a modified example of the twelfth form will be described. In the twelfth form, the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the first form is replaced with a drive circuit 200D (see FIG. 129) including a switch circuit unit 260 (see FIG. 130), and is displayed on the output rate display 300. The rate is displayed. On the other hand, in the modified example of the twelfth form, the drive circuit 200 of the modified example of the first form is replaced with the drive circuit 200D including the switch circuit unit 260, and the base is displayed on the base display 300. Has been done. Since the action and effect of the modified example in this case is only changed based on the output rate with respect to the action and effect of the twelfth form described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<13th form>
The thirteenth form of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 137. In the first embodiment, the output rate display 300 is provided, and the output rate is displayed on the output rate display 300. On the other hand, in the thirteenth form, the output rate is displayed on the game display 40F without providing the output rate display 300. That is, the thirteenth form is characterized in that one display, the game display 40F, can display game information related to the progress of the game and can display the output rate. The game display 40F is arranged on the right side of the game board 2 (plate-shaped member of the game board 2) like the game display 40 of the first form (see FIG. 3). Therefore, when the output rate is displayed on the game display 40F, it is possible to check the output rate from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 134, in the game display 40F of the thirteenth form, the first light emitting area 410F and the second light emitting area 420F are not so-called 7-segments, and the first of the game display 40 of the first form. Similar to the light emitting region 410 and the second light emitting region 420 (see FIG. 5), the light emitting units LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16 for each game are arranged. This is because it is difficult to distinguish the type of jackpot symbol in the light emitting mode in the first light emitting region 410F (first special symbol display 41a) and the second light emitting region 420F (second special symbol display 41b). .. On the other hand, the third light emitting area 430F and the fourth light emitting area 440F have a so-called 7-segment display, which is the same as the third lighting area 330 and the fourth lighting area 340 of the output rate display 300 of the first embodiment (FIG. 8), each game light emitting unit LA17 to LA24, LA25 to LA32 are arranged. This is to display the numerical output rate (role ratio, continuous accessory ratio) in the third light emitting region 430F and the fourth light emitting region 440.

The drive circuit of the thirteenth form has the same configuration as the existing drive circuit that displays the game information like the drive circuit 200F of the fourth form (see FIG. 86) described above. That is, unlike the drive circuit 200 of the first form, a circuit unit for displaying the output rate is not newly added. Therefore, the existing drive circuit that displays the game information is used as it is, and the output rate is displayed. In the thirteenth form, as described above, the output rate is indicated by the third light emitting region 430F and the fourth light emitting region 440F of the game display 40F. The ratio of the accessory or the ratio of the continuous accessory is indicated by the first light emitting region 410F of the game display 40F, and whether the output rate is an effective value or the output rate is a reference value is indicated by the game display. It is shown in the second light emitting region 420F of 40F.

However, as shown in FIG. 111, since the first light emitting region 410F and the second light emitting region 420F are not so-called 7-segment displays, the numbers are not shown. Therefore, in the 111th form, if all the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 in the first light emitting region 410F are emitting light, the accessory ratio is shown. On the other hand, if all the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 in the first light emitting region 410F are not emitting light (if they are turned off), the continuous accessory ratio is shown. Further, if all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting region 420F are emitting light, the output rate as an effective value is shown. On the other hand, if all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting region 420F are not emitting light (if they are turned off), the output rate as a reference value is shown.

[Output rate display process] In the output rate display process (S2304) of the thirteenth form shown in FIG. 135, instead of steps S2504, S2505, S2514, S2515 of the output rate display process (S2304) of the first form shown in FIG. , Steps S3001, S3002, S3003, S3004 are provided. As shown in FIG. 135, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0010] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 in step S3001, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to "H" level (S3001). As a result, the light emitting region that can be turned on (light emitted) becomes the third light emitting region 430F. Then, after executing step S2507 or S2508, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2509). As a result, the tens digit of the output rate (combined accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio) is displayed in the third light emitting region 430F. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0001] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 in step S3003, and then switches the output level of the select signal XCSE0 to the "H" level. (S3004). As a result, the light emitting region that can be turned on (light emitted) becomes the fourth light emitting region 440F. Then, after executing step S2517 or S2518, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2519). As a result, the first digit of the output rate is displayed in the fourth light emitting region 440F.

In the output rate display process (S2304) of the thirteenth form shown in FIG. 136, in steps S2524, S2525, S2527, S2528, S2533, S2534, S2536, S2538 of the output rate display process (S2304) of the first form shown in FIG. 55. Instead, steps S3005, S3006, S3007, S3008, S3009, S3010, S3011, S3012 are provided. As shown in FIG. 136, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0 ... 3] = D [1000] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 in step S3005, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to "H" level (S3006). As a result, the light emitting region that can be turned on (light emitted) becomes the first light emitting region 410F.

If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2526), the data information D [0 ... 7] = D [1 ... 1] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S3007), and the select signal XCSE1 is output. The output level of is switched to the "H" level (S2529). As a result, it is shown that all the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 in the first light emitting region 410F emit light, and the output rate displayed in the third light emitting region 430F and the fourth light emitting region 440F is the accessory ratio. Is done. On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2526), data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S3008). The output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2529). As a result, all the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 in the first light emitting region 410F do not emit light, and the output rate displayed in the third light emitting region 430F and the fourth light emitting region 440F is the continuous accessory ratio. Is shown.

Further, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 ... 3] = D [0100] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 in step S3009, and then switches the output level of the select signal XCSE0 to the "H" level. (S3010). As a result, the light emitting region that can be turned on (light emitted) becomes the second light emitting region 420F. Then, if the value of the actual total prize ball counter is "100" or more (YES in S2535), or the value of the fluctuation count counter is "3000" or more (YES in S2537), the data information from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 D [0 ... 7] = D [1 ... 1] is output (S3011), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2539). As a result, it is shown that all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting region 420F emit light, and the output rates displayed in the third light emitting region 430F and the fourth light emitting region 440F are effective values. .. On the other hand, if the value of the actual total prize ball counter is less than "100" (NO in S2535) and the value of the fluctuation count counter is less than "3000" (NO in S2537), the input / output terminal D0 Data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from ~ D7 (S3012), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2539). As a result, it is shown that all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting region 420F do not emit light, and the output rates displayed in the third light emitting region 430F and the fourth light emitting region 440 are reference values. Is done.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the thirteenth form, it is possible to display the output rate by using the game display 40F that displays the game information related to the progress of the game. That is, it is not necessary to newly provide a dedicated display or an electric circuit (drive circuit) in order to display the output rate, and only a software change to the game control microcomputer 81 is required. Therefore, it is possible to display the output rate with almost no design change from the existing pachinko gaming machine 1. In other words, it is possible to prevent a design change for displaying the output rate from incurring a very large cost and labor. Further, the game display 40F is not arranged on the back side of the game machine frame 50 as in each of the above-described forms, but is arranged on the game board 2. Therefore, the output rate displayed on the game display 40F can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it easy to confirm the output rate. Since the other actions and effects of the thirteenth form are substantially the same as the above-mentioned actions and effects of the first form, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Modified example of the thirteenth form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 as a modified example of the thirteenth form will be described. In the thirteenth form, the output rate is displayed on the game display 40F (see FIG. 134) without providing the output rate display 300 for displaying the output rate. On the other hand, in the modified example of the thirteenth form, the base display 300 for displaying the base is not provided, and the base is displayed on the game display 40F. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134, numerical bases (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base) are displayed in the third light emitting region 430F and the fourth light emitting region 440F of the game display 40F.

Then, when displaying the normal base, one game light emitting unit LA1 is made to emit light in the first light emitting region 410F of the game display 40F. When displaying the time saving base, the two game light emitting units LA1 and LA2 are made to emit light in the first light emitting region 410F of the game display 40F. When displaying the jackpot base, the three game light emitting units LA1, LA2, and LA3 are made to emit light in the first light emitting region 410F of the game display 40F. Further, when displaying the base as an effective value, all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 are made to emit light in the second light emitting region 420F of the game display 40F. On the other hand, when displaying the base as a reference value, all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 are not made to emit light (turn off) in the second light emitting area 420F of the game display 40F. The above-mentioned light emission mode is only an example and can be changed as appropriate. Since the action and effect of the modified example in this case is only changed based on the output rate with respect to the action and effect of the thirteenth form described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<14th form>
The 14th form of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 137. In the first embodiment, the display condition for displaying the output rate on the output rate display 300 is that the game machine frame 50 is open and the customer is waiting. On the other hand, in the fourteenth form, the display condition is that the RAM clear switch (RAM clear operation means) 152 has been operated and the customer is waiting.

[Output Process] In the output process (S107) of the 14th form shown in FIG. 137, step S2314 is provided in place of step S2301 of the output process (S107) of the first form shown in FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 137, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the display flag is “1” (S2314). As described above, the display flag is switched to either "1" or "2" by operating the RAM clear switch 152. If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2314) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), the output rate display process is executed (S2304). On the other hand, if the display flag is "2" (NO in S2314) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the game display process is executed (S2303). In the initial setting, the display flag is set to "1", but the display flag is switched to "2" immediately after the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on. Therefore, at this time, the game display process (S2303) is performed.

A person who confirms the output rate in this way can display the output rate on the output rate display 300 by operating the RAM clear switch 152 after opening the game machine frame 50 after waiting for the customer to enter the waiting state. It is possible. Even if the RAM clear switch 152 is operated except when the power is turned on, the information stored in the game RAM 84 is not cleared. In the 14th mode, unlike the first mode, the display of the accessory ratio and the display of the continuous accessory ratio are not switched by operating the RAM clear switch 152, and every predetermined time (for example, 1 minute). The display of the accessory ratio and the display of the continuous accessory ratio are automatically switched.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 14th form, it is possible to display the output rate only when it is desired to confirm the output rate by operating the RAM clear switch 152. By the way, normally, the RAM clear switch 152 is operated only when the power is turned on. Therefore, according to the fourteenth form, the existing operation means for displaying the output rate is not used after the power is turned on, considering that the design change will be large if the operation means for displaying the output rate is newly provided on the main control board 80 and other parts. The RAM clear switch 152 is effectively used. Therefore, it is possible to arbitrarily display the output rate while reducing the design change. Since the other effects of the 14th form are substantially the same as those of the 1st form described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Modified example of the 14th form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 as a modified example of the 14th form will be described with reference to FIG. 138. In the 14th embodiment, the display condition for displaying the output rate on the output rate display 300 is that the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated and that the customer is waiting. On the other hand, in the modified example of the 14th form, the display condition for displaying the base on the base display 300 is that the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated and the customer is waiting. ..

[Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 138, in the output processing (S107) of the modified example of the 14th form, step S2350 is replaced with step S2301 of the output processing (S107) of the modified example of the first form shown in FIG. Is provided. As shown in FIG. 138, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the display flag is “1” (S2314). In the modified example of the 14th form, unlike the modified example of the first form described above, the display flag is switched to either "1" or "2" by operating the RAM clear switch 152. If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2350) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), the base display process is executed (S2340). On the other hand, if the display flag is "2" (NO in S2340) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the game display process is executed (S2303). In the initial setting, the display flag is set to "1", but the display flag is switched to "2" immediately after the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on.

The person who confirms the base in this way can display the base on the base display 300 by waiting for the customer to wait, opening the game machine frame 50, and then operating the RAM clear switch 152. .. In the modified example of the 14th form, unlike the modified example of the first form, the display of the normal base, the display of the time saving base, and the display of the jackpot base are not switched by the operation of the RAM clear switch 152. , The normal base display, the time saving base display, and the jackpot base display are automatically switched every predetermined time (for example, 1 minute).

As described above, according to the modified example of the 14th form, it is possible to display the base only when the base is to be confirmed by operating the RAM clear switch 152. In particular, if an operating means for displaying the base is newly provided on the main control board 80 or other parts, the design change will be large. Therefore, by effectively using the existing RAM clear switch 152 that is not used after the power is turned on, It is possible to display the base arbitrarily while reducing the design change. Since the action and effect of the other modified examples are only changed based on the output rate with respect to the action and effect of the 14th form described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Other variants>
In each of the above modes and variations thereof, the game machine frame 50 opens the display condition for displaying the output rate on the output rate display 300 or the display condition for displaying the base on the base display 300. Moreover, it is determined that the customer is waiting, or the RAM clear switch 152 is operated and the customer is waiting. However, the display conditions can be changed as appropriate, for example, only the game machine frame 50 is opened, only the customer waiting state, or only the RAM clear switch 152 is operated, or the game machine frame 50 is open and the customer waiting state. It is also possible that the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated. Further, a new switch (operating means) may be provided on the back side of the game machine frame 50, and the display condition may be that the switch is operated. Further, the display condition may be that a specific operation (for example, an operation in a certain setting screen) is performed by the effect button 63 or the select button 64 (operation means).

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof, the light emitting selection circuit units 210 and 210A are configured to include two integrated circuits (IC1 and IC2). However, the light emission selection circuit unit may be configured to include one or three or more integrated circuit ICs. Further, the light emitting drive circuit unit 220 is configured to include two integrated circuits (IC3, IC4). However, the light emitting drive circuit unit may be configured to include one or three or more integrated circuit ICs. Further, the lighting selection circuit unit 230 is configured to include two integrated circuits (IC5, IC6), and the lighting selection circuit unit 250 is configured to include one integrated circuit (IC6). However, the lighting selection circuit unit may be configured to include three or more integrated circuit ICs. Further, the lighting drive circuit unit 240 is configured to include two integrated circuits (IC7, IC8). However, the lighting drive circuit unit may be configured to include one or three or more integrated circuit ICs.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof, as the game display 40, those in which the light emitting units LA1 to LA32 for each game are arranged are used as shown in FIG. However, the game display is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 5, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the game display may be one in which each light emitting unit is arranged as shown in FIG. 139. Further, the game display may be a so-called 4-series 7-segment display as shown in FIG. In this case, as described in the thirteenth form, when displaying the output rate on the game display (4 consecutive 7-segment display), it is possible to indicate the output rate and the base as numerical values.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof, the game display 40 emits light corresponding to a total of 32 bits of 4 common × 8 (N = 8) bits. However, for example, it may have only the first light emitting region 410 and the second light emitting region 420, and emit light corresponding to a total of 16 bits of 2 common × 8 bits. Alternatively, it may emit light corresponding to a total of 16 bits of 4 common × 4 (N = 4) bits, and the number of light emitting regions and the number of light emitting parts that can emit light in each light emitting region (natural number N). Can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof, a so-called 4-series 7-segment display was used as the output rate display 300 or the base display 300 as shown in FIG. However, the output rate display or the base display 300 is not limited to the 4-series 7-segment display, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the output rate display or the base display may be one in which each lighting unit is arranged instead of each of the game light emitting units LA1 to LA32 shown in FIG. 134, and each game light emitting unit LA1 to LA32 shown in FIG. Each lighting part may be arranged instead of. However, if the output rate display or base display is not a 7-segment type as shown in FIG. 5, the output rate or base cannot be indicated as a numerical value. In this case, for example, the number of lit parts lit in the first lighting area indicates the output rate or the tens digit of the base, and if the eight lit parts are blinking, the output rate or the tens digit of the base is indicated. It will be "9". In addition, the number of lighting parts that are lit in the second lighting area indicates the output rate or the first place of the base, and if the eight lighting parts for the output rate are blinking, the first place of the output rate is "9". Let's be. In this way, only the person who confirms the output rate or the base may use a manual or the like to understand the display (output rate, base) on the output rate display or the base display.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator lights up corresponding to a total of 32 bits of 4 common × 8 (N = 8) bits. However, for example, it may have only the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320, and may be lit corresponding to a total of 16 bits of 2 common × 8 bits. Alternatively, it may be lit corresponding to a total of 16 bits of 4 common × 4 (N = 4) bits, and the number of lit areas and the number of lit parts that can be lit in each lit area (natural number N). Can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof, the number of light emitting units (8) provided in one light emitting area of the game display 40 and one lighting area of the output rate display 300 or the base display 300 are provided. The number of lighting parts (8) was the same. However, the number of light emitting units provided in one light emitting region and the number of lighting units provided in one lighting region may be different. Further, in each of the above forms and the modified examples thereof, the number of light emitting areas (4) included in the game display 40 and the number of lighting areas (4) included in the output rate display 300 or the base display 300 are the same. .. However, the number of light emitting regions and the number of lighting regions may be different.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof, the output rate (role ratio or continuous accessory ratio) is displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 of the output rate display 300, and the base display 300 The base (normal base, time saving base, or jackpot base) was displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320. However, the lighting area for displaying the output rate or the base can be changed as appropriate, and for example, the output rate or the base may be displayed in the third lighting area 330 and the fourth lighting area 340. In addition, the tens and ones digits are displayed as percentages on the output rate, normal base, or time saving base. However, even if it is 60%, for example, the decimal point may be displayed together with "0.60". In addition, only the tens digit may be displayed with the output rate, the normal base, or the time saving base as a percentage display. In this way, it is possible to display only one lighting area. In this case, it is preferable to round off the ones digit. Further, the accessory ratio may be displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320, and the continuous accessory ratio may be displayed in the third lighting area 330 and the fourth lighting area 340, and vice versa. You may do so. Also, regarding the jackpot base, the decimal point may be displayed together, or only the hundreds digit may be displayed.

Further, in each of the above modes and the modified examples thereof, since the pachinko game machine 1 is capable of executing the big hit game but does not execute the small hit game, FIGS. 11 (A), 65 (A), and 109 (A) show. The total number of prize balls and the number of bonus balls operated by the accessory were measured using the prize ball counter addition table shown in. However, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine capable of performing a small hit game, the total number of prize balls and the number of bonus balls operated by the accessory may be measured using the prize ball counter addition table shown in FIG. That is, when the game ball wins the first big prize opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 by executing the small hit game, the value of the 100-ball counter and the value of the bonus ball number counter are set to "15". However, it is sufficient not to increase the value of the continuous prize ball counter.

Further, in each of the above modes, a counter for 100 balls and a counter for the actual total number of prize balls were used in order to measure the total number of prize balls, which is the denominator for calculating the output rate, as one in units of 100 balls. However, the total number of prize balls may be measured as one in units other than 100 balls, and for example, a counter for 50 balls or a counter for 200 balls may be used. Further, the total number of prize balls may be measured in units of one ball using only one counter called the total number of prize balls counter. In this case, when calculating the bonus ball ratio, the value of the total prize ball counter measured in units of one ball may be divided by the value of the bonus ball counter and multiplied by 100, which is continuous. When calculating the bonus ball ratio, the value of the total prize ball counter measured in units of one ball may be divided by the value of the continuous bonus ball counter and multiplied by 100.

Further, in the modification of each of the above forms, a counter for 100 balls and a counter for the number of normal launch balls are used in order to measure the number of launch balls, which is the denominator for calculating the normal base, as one in units of 100 balls. There was. Further, in order to measure the number of launching balls as the denominator for calculating the time saving base as one in units of 100 balls, a time saving 100 ball counter and a time saving firing ball number counter were used. Further, in order to measure the number of launching balls, which is the denominator for calculating the jackpot base, as one in 100-ball units, a jackpot 100-ball counter and a jackpot launching ball counter were used. However, the number of each of these launched balls may be measured as one in units other than 100 balls, and for example, a counter for 50 balls or a counter for 200 balls may be used. Further, the number of shot balls in the normal game state, the number of shot balls in the time saving state, and the number of shot balls in the jackpot game state may be measured in units of one ball using one counter. In this case, for example, when calculating the normal base, the value of the counter measured in units of one ball may be divided by the value of the normal total prize ball counter and multiplied by 100.

Further, in the modified example of each of the above forms, the base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base) is calculated and displayed by dividing into each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the time saving state, and the jackpot gaming state. However, the range for dividing the base can be changed as appropriate, and for example, the base other than the jackpot gaming state and the base in the jackpot gaming state may be calculated and displayed. In addition, the base may be calculated and displayed in consideration of all the states from the time the power is turned on to the present time, without dividing by the game state. Alternatively, the base limited to a specific state (for example, a time saving state) may be calculated and displayed.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned forms and the modified examples thereof, the total number of prize balls and the total number of launched balls were measured from the time when the power was first turned on (predetermined start time). However, the above-mentioned predetermined start time can be changed as appropriate, for example, even from a specific date and time (January 1, 2017) or a time when a hall employee or the like starts a specific setting. good.

Further, in the first embodiment, if the total number of prize balls is less than 10,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3,000, "0" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340 to indicate that the output rate is a reference value. It was. On the other hand, when the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more, "1" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340 to indicate that the output rate is an effective value. However, if the total number of prize balls is less than 10,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3,000, the output rate is not displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 (that is, the output rate as a reference value is not shown). ), If the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more, the output rate may be displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320. In this case, it is possible to make the person who confirms the output rate judge the output rate as a value that has converged to some extent (the output rate as an effective value) on the condition that the output rate is displayed. is there.

Further, in the first form, the output rate is an effective value if either the first condition that the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more and the second condition that the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more is satisfied. I showed that. However, if both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, it may be shown that the output rate is an effective value. Further, it is also possible to provide only one of the first condition and the second condition to indicate whether or not the output rate is an effective value. When only the first condition is provided, the output rate is displayed if the first condition is satisfied, but the output rate may not be displayed if the first condition is not satisfied. Further, when only the second condition is provided, the output rate is displayed if the second condition is satisfied, but the output rate may not be displayed if the second condition is not satisfied. Further, if the time from the first power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is measured and the third condition that the measured time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 hours) is satisfied, the output rate is an effective value. May be shown. Further, it may be shown that the output rate is an effective value under a condition that is appropriately combined from the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition.

Further, in the first embodiment, in order to determine that the output rate is an effective value that has converged to some extent, it is determined whether or not the total number of prize balls is 10,000 (predetermined value) or more, or the number of fluctuations is 3000 ( It was determined whether or not the number of rotations was equal to or higher than the predetermined number of rotations. However, the value of the total number of prize balls and the value of the predetermined number of rotations can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is determined whether or not the total number of prize balls is 30,000 or more (predetermined number of prize balls), or the number of fluctuations is determined. It may be determined whether or not it is 10000 times (predetermined rotation speed) or more.

Further, in the first embodiment, "1" (a specific number) is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340 in order to notify that the output rate is an effective value. However, the specific number for notifying that it is an effective value is not limited to "1", and may be "7" and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, it is not always necessary to display a number in order to notify that the output rate is an effective value. For example, if "-" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340, it may be notified that the output rate is an effective value. Further, the fact that the output rate is an effective value may be notified in a lighting area other than the fourth lighting area 340, and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the first embodiment, the output rate is notified by displaying the output rate on the output rate display 300. However, the output rate may be notified by outputting a sound indicating the output rate from the speaker (sound output means) 67. In this case, the main control board 80 transmits a command including the calculated output rate information to the sub control board 90, and the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the voice control board 106 based on the command including the output rate information. It will be controlled (voice control). Based on the establishment of the above display conditions, the output rate display 300 may be used to display the output rate, and the speaker 67 may output a sound indicating the output rate, or the speaker 67 may output a sound indicating the output rate. You may output only.

Further, in the first mode, the output rate is notified that the output rate is an effective value by the display on the output rate display 300. However, the notification that the output rate is an effective value can be changed as appropriate. For example, a specific display is performed on the image display device 7 or a sub liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as a panel lamp 5 or a frame lamp 66 is made to emit light in a specific light emitting mode, or a specific notification sound is output from a speaker 67. Thereby, it may be notified that the output rate is an effective value.

Further, in the first embodiment, the display of the game information on the game display 40 and the display of the output rate on the output rate display 300 are selectively performed. However, for example, as in the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, the drive circuit 200X can be configured to simultaneously execute the display of the game information on the game display 40 and the display of the output rate on the output rate display 300. You may do so.

Further, in the first embodiment, the control process (specific control process) related to the variable display of the special symbol or the control process (specific control process) during the control of the jackpot game state is executed in the game control state. When it is, the output rate is not calculated (the output rate calculation process (S117, see FIG. 45) is not executed). However, when the output rate is not calculated, it can be changed as appropriate. For example, when the control process (specific control process) during the control in the time saving state is being executed, the output rate may not be calculated. .. Further, for example, the payout rate may not be calculated until the total number of prize balls reaches a specific number.

Further, in the first embodiment, the total number of prize balls can be measured in units of 100 balls by using the counter for 100 balls and the counter for the actual total number of prize balls. However, in order to measure the total number of prize balls in units of 100 balls, it is not necessary to use two counters (counter for 100 balls, counter for actual total number of prize balls), which can be changed as appropriate. For example, by dividing the value of the total prize ball counter by 100 using only the total prize ball counter that measures the total number of prize balls in one unit, the value with one hundred ball unit is measured. You can do it. Note that "measurement" means to grasp the quantity for a certain purpose.

Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, if the total number of shot balls is less than 100,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3,000, "0" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340 and the base is a reference value. showed that. On the other hand, when the total number of shot balls is 100,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 3,000 or more, "1" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340 to indicate that the base is an effective value. However, if the total number of shots is less than 100,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3,000, the base is not displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 (that is, the base as a reference value is not shown). If the total number of shot balls is 100,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 3,000 or more, the base may be displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320. In this case, it is possible to make the person who confirms the base judge the base as a value that has converged to some extent (base as an effective value) on the condition that the base is displayed.

Further, in the modified example of the first form, if either the first condition that the total number of launched balls is 100,000 or more and the second condition that the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more is satisfied, the base is an effective value. It was shown that. However, if both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, it may be shown that the base is a valid value. Further, it is also possible to provide only one of the first condition and the second condition to indicate whether or not the base is an effective value. When only the first condition is provided, the base is displayed if the first condition is satisfied, but the base may not be displayed if the first condition is not satisfied. Further, when only the second condition is provided, the base is displayed if the second condition is satisfied, but the base may not be displayed if the second condition is not satisfied. Further, if the time from the first power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is measured and the third condition that the measured time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 hours) is satisfied, the base is an effective value. It may be shown. Further, it may be shown that the base is an effective value by a condition that is appropriately combined from the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition.

Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, in order to determine that the base is an effective value that has converged to some extent, it is determined whether or not the total number of launched balls is 100,000 shots (predetermined value) or more, or the number of fluctuations is 3000. It was determined whether or not the number of rotations (predetermined rotation speed) or more was increased. However, the value of the total number of launched balls and the value of the predetermined number of revolutions can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is determined whether or not the total number of launched balls is 300,000 (predetermined value) or more, or the number of fluctuations is 10,000. It may be determined whether or not it is (predetermined rotation speed) or more.

Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, "1" (specific number) is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340 in order to notify that the base is an effective value. However, the specific number for notifying that it is an effective value is not limited to "1", and may be "7" and can be changed as appropriate. Also, it is not always necessary to display a number in order to notify that the base is a valid value. For example, if "-" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340, it may be notified that the base is an effective value. Further, it may be notified that the base is an effective value in a lighting area other than the fourth lighting area 340, and it can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, the base is notified by displaying the base on the base display 300. However, the base may be notified by outputting the sound indicating the base from the speaker (sound output means) 67. In this case, the main control board 80 transmits a command including the calculated base information to the sub control board 90, and the effect control microcomputer 91 controls the voice control board 106 based on the command including the base information ( Voice control). Based on the establishment of the above display conditions, the base display 300 may display the base, and the speaker 67 may output the sound indicating the base, or the speaker 67 may output only the sound indicating the base. You may do so.

Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, the display on the base display 300 notifies that the base is an effective value. However, the notification that the base is a valid value can be changed as appropriate. For example, a specific display is performed on the image display device 7 or a sub liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as a panel lamp 5 or a frame lamp 66 is made to emit light in a specific light emitting mode, or a specific notification sound is output from a speaker 67. By doing so, it may be notified that the base is a valid value.

Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, the display of the game information on the game display 40 and the display of the base on the base display 300 are selectively performed. However, for example, as in the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, the drive circuit 200X is configured so that the display of the game information on the game display 40 and the display of the base on the base display 300 can be executed at the same time. You may.

Further, in the modified example of the first form, the control process (specific control process) related to the variable display of the special symbol or the control process (specific control process) in the control of the jackpot game state is in the game control state. When is executing, the base is not calculated (the base calculation process (S152, see FIG. 66) is not executed). However, when the base is not calculated, it can be changed as appropriate. For example, when the control process (specific control process) during the control in the time saving state is being executed, the base may not be calculated. Further, for example, the base may not be calculated until the total number of launched balls reaches a specific number.

Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, for example, a counter for 100 balls and a counter for the number of normally launched balls are used so that the number of launched balls in the normal game state can be measured in units of 100 balls. However, in order to measure the number of fired balls in the normal game state with one hundred ball unit as one, it is not necessary to use two counters (normally 100 ball counter, normal fired ball number counter), and it can be changed as appropriate. Is. For example, by dividing the value of the normal launch ball counter by 100 using only the normal launch ball counter that measures the number of launch balls in the normal game state, the value is set to one hundred ball unit. May be measured. The number of launched balls in the time-saving state or the number of launched balls in the jackpot game state may also be measured by dividing by 100 using only the counter that measures in units of one ball.

Further, in the first form, the output rate is displayed, and in the modified example of the first form, the base is displayed. However, the configuration of the first form and the configuration of the modified example thereof may be combined so that both the base and the output rate can be displayed. In this case, both the base and the output rate may be displayed simultaneously on one display (display means), or the output rate and the base may be selectively displayed. Alternatively, the base and the output rate may be displayed separately for two separate indicators.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof, the output rate display 300 or the base display 300 is used as the main control board 80 (see FIG. 6) and the rear side cases 401A to 401D of the main board cases 400A to 400D (FIGS. 80 to 83). ), Arranged on the payout control board 110 (FIG. 113). However, the location where the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is arranged is not limited to the above-mentioned location, and can be appropriately changed as long as it does not obstruct the line-of-sight of the mounting surface 80a of the main control board 80. For example, as shown in FIG. 141, it may be arranged on the transparent central cover 55 located at the rearmost position of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 arranged on the central cover 55 may be connected to the connector CN5 of the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC5. The central cover 55 is attached to the game machine frame 50 and protects various control boards and the back unit of the game board 2 from the rear.

Further, in the third form and each of the modified examples thereof, as shown in FIGS. 80 to 83, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is moved by moving (rotating or sliding) the rear side cases 401A to 401D. I moved it. However, it may be changed as follows.

That is, as shown in FIG. 142, a rectangular notch 401a is formed on the left side of the rear side case 401E of the main board case 400E. Cylindrical shaft members 401b and 401c extending in the vertical direction are provided on the left side and the right side of the notch 401a, respectively. Cylindrical portions 300a and 300b provided at both left and right ends of the output rate indicator 300 are slidably inserted into the shaft members 401b and 401c in the vertical direction. The output rate display 300 or the base display 300 is connected to the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC6, and the notch 401a, the shaft members 401b, 401c, and the cylindrical portions 300a, 300b are connected to the moving mechanism portion. Corresponds to. In this way, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is arranged below the notch 401a in the normal state as shown in FIG. 142 (A). However, at this time, the visibility of the integrated circuit IC 10 (see FIG. 142 (B)) located in front of the output rate display 300 or the base display 300 is deteriorated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 142 (B), if the output rate display 300 or the base display 300 is slid upward with respect to the rear side case 401E, the visibility of the integrated circuit IC 10 can be ensured. .. With this configuration, it is possible to move the output rate display 300 or the base display 300 without moving the rear case 401E. In addition to the modified example shown in FIG. 142, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be configured to be slid or rotated in the left-right direction without moving the rear case.

Further, in the second modification and the third modification of the third embodiment, the output rate indicator 300 is moved in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. However, if the integrated circuit mounted on the mounting surface 80a can be easily seen, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be movable in the front-rear direction. Then, the output rate display 300 or the base display 300 may be movable in any two or more of the left-right direction, the up-down direction, and the front-back direction.

Further, in the second modification and the third modification of the third embodiment, the output rate indicator 300 is slid parallel to the mounting surface 80a of the main control board 80. That is, the output rate display 300 was slid in a direction orthogonal to the orthogonal axis of the mounting surface 80a. However, the output rate display 300 or the base display 300 may be slid so as to be inclined rather than parallel to the mounting surface 80a as long as it intersects the orthogonal axis of the mounting surface 80a.

Further, in the third embodiment and each of the modified examples thereof, the output rate display 300 or the base display 300 is not opposed to the mounting surface 80a of the main control board 80 (FIGS. 80 (C), 81 (C), It has been made possible to move to FIGS. 82 (B) and 83 (B). However, as shown in FIG. 142, the output rate display 300 or the base display 300 may be movable only within the range facing the mounting surface 80a. Further, the output rate display 300 or the base display 300 may be slightly moved within a range not facing the mounting surface 80a.

Further, in the above-mentioned third form and each modification thereof, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is configured to be movable with respect to the main control board (predetermined member) 80. However, it is possible to appropriately change which member the output rate indicator or the base indicator 300 can be moved to. For example, the payout rate indicator 300 or the base display 300 is arranged in the payout board case 500 (see FIG. 7), and the payout rate indicator 300 or the base display 300 is moved with respect to the payout control board (predetermined member) 110. It may be configured so that it can be done.

Further, in the third form and each modification thereof, the output rate display 300 or the base display 300 is configured to be rotatable or slidable. However, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be moved by a method other than rotation or sliding. For example, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is attached to an urging mechanism (moving mechanism unit) provided with a spring member, and the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is pressed against the urging force of the spring member. As a result, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be moved.

Further, in the third form and the first modification thereof, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the output rate indicator 300 is moved (rotated) to a region not facing the mounting surface 80a. However, the output rate indicator 300 may be moved (rotated or slid, etc.) so that the area facing the mounting surface 80a becomes smaller within the range in which the output rate indicator 300 faces the mounting surface 80a. In this case, for example, the output rate indicator 300 is moved from a position facing a portion of the mounting surface 80a where many integrated circuits are mounted to a position facing a portion of the mounting surface 80a where many integrated circuits are not mounted. You may move it. The base display 300 may be moved as described above.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the checksum of the special memory 89 calculated when the power is turned on is compared with the checksum of the special memory 89 calculated when the power is turned off, and each checksum is one. If so, the stored contents of the special memory 89 are retained, and if the checksums do not match, the stored contents of the special memory 89 are deleted. However, if the checksum of the game RAM 84 calculated when the power is turned on and the checksum of the game RAM 84 calculated at the time of power failure match, it is estimated that the stored contents of the special memory 89 are correct, and the special memory 89 is assumed to be correct. Holds the memory contents of. On the other hand, if the checksums do not match, it may be assumed that the stored contents of the special memory 89 are incorrect, and the stored contents of the special memory 89 may be erased. By doing so, it is possible to omit the process of calculating and collating the checksum of the special memory 89. That is, it is possible to easily check whether or not the stored contents of the special memory 89 are correct by using the calculation and collation of the checksum of the gaming RAM 84 that has been conventionally performed. As a specific process, the power-on process (S001) shown in FIG. 143 may be executed instead of the power-on process (S001) shown in FIG. 43.

Further, in the first mode, if the checksum of the special memory 89 calculated when the power is turned on and the checksum of the special memory 89 calculated when the power is turned off do not match, the stored contents of the special memory 89 are deleted. I made it. However, the stored contents of the special memory 89 may be erased by a special operation on the operating means (for example, pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 152 for 10 seconds when the power is turned on). That is, an operating means for erasing the stored contents of the special memory 89 may be provided.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C, the gaming RAM 84 and the special memory 89 are provided as separate storage means. However, as shown in FIG. 144, one game RAM 84a may be provided so as to have both a storage area (game area) included in the game RAM 84 and a storage area (special area) included in the special memory 89. In this case, when the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the game area are erased, but the stored contents of the special area are not erased. Then, the checksum of the game area and the checksum of the special area are calculated separately, and the stored contents of the special area are retained or erased based on the collation of the checksum of the special area. Is also good. Alternatively, the entire checksum including the game area and the special area may be calculated, and the stored contents of the special area may be retained or erased based on the collation of the checksum.

Further, in the first embodiment, a checksum is used as an error detection code calculated to determine whether or not the stored contents of the gaming RAM 84 and the special memory 89 are normal. However, the error detection code is not limited to the checksum and can be changed as appropriate. For example, by obtaining a parity bit (error detection code) of "0" or "1" in order to maintain the overall evenness of the data in binary, and collating the data to which the parity bit is assigned. , It may be determined whether or not the stored contents are normal.

Further, in the first embodiment, the calculation of the output rate is simplified by dividing the total number of prize balls by the value measured with one hundred ball unit as one with respect to the number of prize balls for operating the accessory. However, the method for simplifying the calculation of the output rate is not limited to the above method, and for example, the following method may be used.

That is, a character operating prize ball counter capable of measuring the number of character operating prize balls (number of character prize balls or continuous prize balls) as information of, for example, 32 bits (first bit range), and a total prize ball. A total prize ball counter that can measure the number as, for example, 32-bit information is prepared. Then, when calculating the output rate, first, among the 32-bit information measured by the total prize ball counter, the digit to be "1", which is a significant digit, is searched from the upper digit. Next, for example, 16-bit (second bit range) information is extracted from the digit (significant digit) in which significant figures are found. In this way, 16-bit information on the total number of prize balls is created. Subsequently, from the 32-bit information measured by the bonus ball number counter, the information corresponding to the 16-bit digit of the created total prize ball number is extracted. For example, when the information from the upper 14th digit to the upper 30th digit is extracted from the 32-bit information measured by the total prize ball counter, the 32-bit information measured by the accessory operation prize ball counter is used. From the information, the information from the upper 14th digit to the upper 30th digit is extracted. In this way, 16-bit information on the number of prize balls for the accessory operation is created. Then, the output rate is calculated by dividing the 16-bit information of the number of prize balls for the bonus operation by the 16-bit information of the total number of prize balls. With this method, it is possible to easily calculate the output rate (reduce the processing load) by dividing by the information of 16 bits instead of dividing by the information of 32 bits. And if it is a method of simply extracting 16-bit information from the most significant digit, the error from the correct output rate value will be large when the total number of prize balls is relatively small, such as 1,000 shots. With this method, 16-bit information is extracted from the effective digits, so the total number of prize balls is relatively large, such as 100,000, and the total number of prize balls is relatively small, such as 1,000. However, it is possible to reduce the error from the correct output rate value.

Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, for example, the total number of prize balls in the normal game state is divided by the value measured in units of 100 balls as one in the normal game state. Simplified base calculation. However, the method for simplifying the base calculation is not limited to the above method, and may be, for example, the following method.

That is, a total prize ball counter that can measure the total number of prize balls as information of, for example, 32 bits (first bit range), and a total number of shot balls counter that can measure the total number of fired balls as information of, for example, 32 bits. prepare. Then, when calculating the base, first, among the 32-bit information measured by the total number of fired balls counter, the digit to be the significant digit "1" is searched from the upper digit. Next, for example, 16-bit (second bit range) information is extracted from the digit (significant digit) in which significant figures are found. In this way, 16-bit information on the total number of launched balls is created. Subsequently, from the 32-bit information measured by the total prize ball counter, the information corresponding to the 16-bit digit of the created total number of launched balls is extracted. For example, when the information from the upper 14th digit to the upper 30th digit is extracted from the 32-bit information measured by the total number of launched balls counter, the 32-bit information measured by the total number of winning balls counter is used. Among them, the information from the upper 14th digit to the upper 30th digit is extracted. In this way, 16-bit information on the total number of prize balls is created. Then, the base is calculated by dividing the 16-bit information of the total number of prize balls by the 16-bit information of the total number of launched balls. With this method, it is possible to easily (reduce the processing load) the base calculation by dividing by the information of 16 bits instead of dividing by the information of 32 bits. And if it is a method of simply extracting 16-bit information from the most significant digit, the error from the correct base value will be large when the total number of shots is relatively small, such as 1,000 shots. With this method, 16-bit information is extracted from the effective digits, so even if the total number of shots is relatively large, such as 100,000, or the total number of shots is relatively small, such as 1,000. , It is possible to reduce the error from the correct base value.

Further, in the second mode, as shown in FIG. 75, the measured values for displaying the output rate (total number of prize balls, number of prizes for operating the accessory) stored in the game RAM 84A and the special memory 89A are stored. If the measured values for displaying the output rate are compared with the measured values for displaying the output rate (S027) and the values of the measured values for displaying the output rate do not match (NO in S027), the measurement for displaying the output rate stored in the special memory 89A The value was transferred to the gaming RAM 84A (S026). However, if the values of the measured values for displaying the output rate do not match, the measured values for displaying the output rate stored in the gaming RAM 84A are reset, and the measured values for displaying the output rate stored in the special memory 89A are reset. You may want to reset the value. Alternatively, without performing the above-mentioned collation, when the power is turned on, the measured value for displaying the output rate stored in the special memory 89A may be transferred to the gaming RAM 84A. In the modified example of the second embodiment, it is of course possible to replace the above-mentioned measurement value for output rate display with the measurement value for base display.

Further, in the fourth form and its modification, an external display device (external output rate display device 900 or external base display device 900) is attached to the connector (connection portion) CN3 provided on the main control board 80, and the external display device is attached. The output rate or base can be displayed on. However, the connection portion for attaching the external display device may be provided in a portion other than the main control board 80, and may be provided in, for example, the payout control board 110, the game board 2, and the game machine frame 50. Further, the structure of the connecting portion is not limited to the connector, and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the output rate or the base is displayed on the external display device attached to the connector CN3 of the main control board 80. However, the external display device does not display the output rate or the base, and the output rate (role ratio, continuous accessory ratio) or base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base) is within the normal range depending on the mode such as light emitting means. It may be possible to notify only whether or not there is.

Further, in the sixth and seventh forms and their modified examples, if the output rate or the base is within the normal range, the special LED 350 is set to the lighting mode (first mode), and the output rate or the base is out of the normal range. If so, the special LED 350 is set to the blinking mode (second mode). However, the mode of the special LED 350 can be changed as appropriate, and if the output rate or the base is within the normal range, the special LED 350 is set to blink or turn off, or if the output rate or the base is outside the normal range, the special LED 350 is turned on. It may be in a mode or a light-off mode. Further, when it is determined that the output rate or the base is out of the normal range, the main control board 80 may stop the game control (main control main process). This makes it possible to prevent the player from playing any more games. If it is determined that the output rate or the base is out of the normal range, an abnormal signal is sent from the external terminal plate provided on the pachinko gaming machine 1 to an external device (for example, a data counter) other than the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may output it. As a result, it is possible for the external device that has input the abnormality signal to perform the abnormality notification at the output rate or the base.

Further, in the sixth form, the output rate exceeds the predetermined value after satisfying the precondition that the total number of prize balls is 10,000 (predetermined number of prize balls) or more or the number of fluctuations is 3000 times (predetermined number of rotations) or more. Then, the special LED 350 became a blinking mode. However, the above-mentioned precondition can be changed as appropriate, and for example, the precondition that the total number of prize balls is 30,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 10,000 or more may be used. That is, the value of the predetermined number of prize balls and the value of the predetermined number of rotations can be changed as appropriate. It should be noted that the value of the predetermined number of prize balls and the value of the predetermined number of rotations are not set at the time of manufacturing the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be arbitrarily set by the operation of, for example, an employee of the hall (game hall). good. Further, only the precondition that the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more, or the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more may be used. Further, it may be a precondition that the total number of prize balls is 10,000 (predetermined number of prize balls) or more and the number of fluctuations is 3000 times (predetermined number of rotations) or more. Moreover, you may not set the precondition.

Further, in the sixth and seventh forms and their modified examples, a special LED (abnormality notification means, notification means) 350 indicating whether the output rate or the base is abnormal is arranged on the main control board 80. .. However, the arrangement location of the special LED 350 is not limited to the main control board 80 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the special LED 350 may be arranged on the payout control board 110. In this case, the result of the payout rate (feature ratio, continuous bonus ratio) or base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base) is transmitted from the main control board 80 to the payout control board 110 as a command. As a result, the CPU of the payout control board 110 determines whether the payout rate is within the normal range or whether the base is within the normal range based on the reception of the command. Then, the payout control microcomputer 116 may change the light emitting mode of the special LED 350 based on the result of the abnormality determination. By doing so, since the game control microcomputer 81 does not perform the abnormality determination of the output rate or the abnormality determination of the base, it is possible to reduce the burden of the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81.

Alternatively, the special LED 350 may be arranged on an effect control board such as the sub control board 90. In this case, for example, the output rate or the result of the base is transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 as a command. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the output rate abnormality or the base abnormality based on the command. Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 may change the light emitting mode of the special LED 350 based on the result of the abnormality determination. By doing so, since the game control microcomputer 81 does not perform the abnormality determination of the output rate or the abnormality determination of the base, it is possible to reduce the burden of the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81.

Further, in the sixth and seventh forms and their modified examples, a special LED (abnormality notification means, notification means) 350 indicating whether the output rate or the base is abnormal is newly provided, but the existing light emission is emitted. A means (frame lamp 66 or board lamp 5) may be used to indicate whether the LED output rate or the base is abnormal. Further, the abnormality notification means for indicating whether the output rate or the base is abnormal is not limited to the light emitting means, and may be an image display device 7 (display means) or a speaker 67 (sound output means). When the abnormality notification means is the image display device 7, it is sufficient to display a special image on the image display device 7 to show that the output rate and the base are abnormal. Further, when the abnormality notification means is the speaker 67, it is sufficient to show that the output rate and the base are abnormal by outputting a special sound from the speaker 67.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the specified values (70%, 60%) for determining that the output rate is abnormal can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the modified example of the sixth form, the range for determining that the base is within the normal range (30% to 39% for the normal base, 84% to 99% for the time saving base, 600% for the jackpot base). ~ 800%) can also be changed as appropriate. Further, in the seventh embodiment, each value of the simple abnormality determination table (see FIG. 100) for determining that the output rate is substantially abnormal can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, each value of each simple abnormality determination table (see FIGS. 105 (A), (B), (C)) for determining that the base is substantially abnormal is also obtained. It can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105, the value of the number of fired balls (determined number of fired balls) when determining whether or not the total number of prize balls exceeds the normal upper limit value and the total number of shot balls. The value of the number of fired balls (determined number of fired balls) when determining whether or not the number of prize balls was smaller than the lower limit of normal was the same. However, the value of the number of launched balls when determining whether the total number of prize balls exceeds the normal upper limit value and the number of launched balls when determining whether the total number of prize balls is smaller than the normal lower limit value. The value of may be set to be different from each other. Further, in the modified example of the seventh form, both the magnitude determination of whether or not the total number of prize balls exceeds the normal upper limit value and the magnitude determination of whether or not the total prize ball number is smaller than the normal lower limit value are performed. I went, but only one of them may be used.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of prize balls and the number of bonus balls operated by the accessory based on the prize ball command (ball entry information) transmitted from the main control board 80. However, the payout control board 110 may measure the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls for operating the accessory based on the command (signal) transmitted from the main control board 80 separately from the prize ball command. In this case, the above-mentioned command includes information that can determine which winning opening is won. Further, the winning information may be transmitted from the main control board 80 due to the fact that the game ball has won the winning opening, and is transmitted at any timing after the winning timing, not limited to the winning timing of the game ball. You may do so.

Further, in the modified example of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of launched balls and the total number of prize balls based on the prize ball command (entry ball information) transmitted from the main control board 80. However, the payout control board 110 may measure the total number of launched balls and the total number of prize balls based on a command (signal) transmitted from the main control board 80 separately from the prize ball command. In this case, the above command includes information that can determine which entry port the ball has entered. Further, the ball entry information may be transmitted from the main control board 80 due to the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry port, and is not limited to the ball entry timing of the game ball, and is any one after the ball entry timing. It may be transmitted at the timing.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the payout control board (specific control board) 110 is made to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls for operating the accessory. However, a control board other than the payout control board 110 may be made to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls for operating the accessory. For example, the main control board 80 transmits a command capable of determining the winning opening to the sub control board 90, and the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls for the accessory operation based on the command. In addition to measuring, the output rate is calculated. Then, the sub-control board 90 transmits a command indicating the calculation result of the output rate to the image control board 100 so that the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the output rate on the image display device (display means) 7. good. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the burden of the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81. Further, since it is not necessary to provide a new display called the output rate display 300, it is possible to easily realize the display of the output rate.

In short, the process for measuring the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls operated as a bonus (prize ball counter addition process (S114)) and the process for calculating the output rate (output rate calculation process (S117)). And the process for displaying the output rate (output rate display process (S2304)) may be executed on separate control boards, and the combination thereof can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the modified example of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board (specific control board) 110 is made to measure the total number of launched balls and the total number of prize balls. However, a control board other than the payout control board 110 may be made to measure the total number of launched balls and the total number of prize balls. For example, the main control board 80 transmits a command capable of determining the entry port where the ball has entered to the sub control board 90, and the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the total number of launched balls and the total number of prize balls based on the command. Along with measuring, base calculation is performed. Then, the sub-control board 90 may transmit a command indicating the calculation result of the base to the image control board 100 so that the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the base on the image display device (display means) 7. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the burden of the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81. Further, since it is not necessary to provide a new display called the base display 300, it is possible to easily realize the display of the base.

In short, a process for measuring the total number of launched balls and a total number of prize balls (counter addition process (S151)), a process for calculating the base (base calculation process (S152)), and a process for displaying the base. (Base display processing (S2340)) may be executed on separate control boards, and the combination thereof can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the twelfth form and its modified example, as shown in FIG. 130, the switch circuit unit 260 is configured by combining MOSFETs of both N-type and P-type. However, if it is possible to switch between the game display state and the output rate display state, or if it is possible to switch between the game display state and the base display state, the configuration of the switch circuit unit can be changed as appropriate. For example, the switch circuit unit may be configured with either an N-type MOSFET or a P-type MOSFET. Further, the switch circuit unit may be configured by using other types of transistors such as JFETs without using MOSFETs.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof, the output levels (“L” level or “H” level) of the select signals XCSE0, XCSE1 and XCSE10 have been described as appropriate, but by changing the drive circuit, the above-mentioned select signals XCSE0 Of course, it is possible to carry out so as to be different from the output level of XCSE1 and XCSE10. The output levels of the select signals XCSE0, XCSE1, and XCSE10 were set by the output processing (S107) (output rate display processing (S2304), game display processing (S2303), base display processing (S2340)). The microcomputer 81 may be executed as a function provided in advance and may not be executed as an output process (S107).

Further, in each of the above modes and a modification thereof, the game control microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80 stores the programs (output rate calculation process (S117), output rate display process (S2304), base display process (base display process)) stored in the ROM 83. Based on S2340), etc.), the calculation of the output rate, the display of the output rate, the calculation of the base, and the display of the base were executed. However, a ROM different from the ROM 83 that stores the program (main control main process) related to the progress of the game is provided, and the output rate calculation, the output rate display, the base calculation, and the base display are executed in the different ROM. You may memorize the program for doing so. In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 may perform the calculation of the output rate, the display of the output rate, the calculation of the base, and the display of the base based on the program stored in the ROM different from the ROM 83.

Further, in each of the above modes, both the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio can be displayed on the output rate display 300 as the output rate. However, it may be possible to display only one of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio on the output rate display 300.

Further, in the modified example of each of the above forms, the number of balls entered into each winning opening (first starting opening 20, second starting opening 21, first large winning opening 30, second large winning opening 35, normal winning opening 27) is determined. In addition to counting, the total number of launched balls is counted by counting the number of balls entering the out port 16. However, the total number of launched balls may be counted as follows.

As shown in FIG. 145, the out port discharge path HK extends from the out port 16 to the outside of the game area 3, and the first start port discharge path H1 extends from the first start port 20 to the outside of the game area 3. 2 The second starting port discharge path H2 extends from the starting port 21 to the outside of the game area 3, and the first large winning port discharge path H3 extends from the first large winning opening 30 to the outside of the game area 3, and the second large winning port discharge path H3. The second large winning opening discharge route H4 extends from the winning opening 35 to the outside of the game area 3, and the normal winning opening discharge route H5 extends from the normal winning opening 27 to the outside of the game area 3. All of these discharge paths HK, H1, H2, H3, H4, and H5 communicate with the total discharge path HX. A discharge port sensor 16b capable of detecting a game ball flowing in from each discharge path HK, H1, H2, H3, H4, H5 is arranged in the total discharge path HX. The detection signal by the outlet sensor 16b is input to the main control board 80. In this way, by counting the detection by the cloaca sensor 16b, it is possible to count the number of all the game balls discharged to the outside of the game area 3. That is, it is possible to count the total number of launched balls.

In addition, instead of the total discharge port sensor 16b capable of detecting the game balls flowing in from all the discharge paths HK, H1, H2, H3, H4, H5 described above, some discharge paths (for example, discharge paths HK, H1) are used. , H2) may be used to count the total number of launched balls by using an outlet sensor that can detect the game balls that have flowed in. Further, a sensor is provided so as to directly detect the game ball launched toward the game area 3 without using the method of counting the number of game balls discharged to the outside of the game area 3 (for example, near the rail member 4). A sensor may be provided in the vehicle) to count the total number of launched balls.

Further, in each of the above forms and its modified examples, the output rate (specific ratio value), which is the ratio between the total number of prize balls and the number of bonus balls operated by the accessory, is displayed, or the ratio between the total number of prize balls and the total number of launched balls. The base (specific ratio value) that is is displayed. However, the specific ratio value is not limited to the output rate or the base, and can be appropriately changed as long as it is the ratio between a certain first specific game ball number and a certain second specific game ball number. For example, as a specific ratio value, the ratio of the number of balls entered into the first starting port 20 (the number of the first specific game balls) and the number of balls entered into the first large winning opening 30 (the number of the second specific game balls). Or, it is the ratio of the number of balls entering the first starting port 20 (the number of the first specific game balls) and the number of balls entering the second starting port 21 (the number of the second specific game balls), or is normal. It may be a ratio of the number of balls entered into the winning opening 27 (the number of first specific game balls) and the number of balls entered into all the winning openings (the number of second specific game balls). Further, for example, the out ratio value (specific ratio value), which is the ratio between the total number of prize balls and the number of out balls (specific game balls), may be displayed. The number of out balls is the number of game balls that have entered the out opening 16 without winning any of the winning openings. In the out ratio value, if the value of the total number of prize balls is abnormally large with respect to the number of out balls, it is a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can give an unreasonable privilege to the player, and there is an illegal modification, failure, or malfunction. It is possible to determine that it has occurred. On the other hand, if the value of the total number of prize balls is abnormally small with respect to the number of out balls, the pachinko game machine 1 has too few benefits that can be given to the player, and an illegal modification, failure, or malfunction has occurred. It is possible to judge that. In addition, instead of the out ratio value which is the ratio between the total number of prize balls and the number of out balls, the out ratio value which is the ratio between the number of prizes in a specific winning opening and the number of out balls is displayed. Is also good.

Further, in the modified examples of each of the above forms, a base irrelevant to time is calculated and displayed. However, the base at a predetermined time may be calculated and displayed. For example, the base (short-time payout rate) in one hour may be calculated and displayed. In this case, if the base in one hour exceeds 300%, it can be determined that an illegal modification, failure, or defect has occurred. Further, for example, the base (medium time payout rate) at 10 hours may be calculated and displayed. In this case, if the base at 10 hours is smaller than 50% or larger than 200%, it can be determined that an unauthorized modification, failure, or defect has occurred.

Further, in each of the above forms and the modified examples thereof, the output rate or the base is displayed, but as shown below, a value (specific index value) that is an index for determining an abnormality of the game machine may be displayed. .. For example, the number of winnings (specific index value) for each winning opening per predetermined time (1st starting opening 20, 2nd starting opening 21, 1st big winning opening 30, 2nd big winning opening 35, normal winning opening 27). May be displayed. In this case, if the number of winnings in a specific winning opening is extremely large or small compared to the number of winnings in other winning openings, it can be determined that an unauthorized modification, failure, or defect has occurred. It is possible. Alternatively, only the total number of prize balls (number of payout balls) may be displayed. In this case, for example, a person who sees the total number of prize balls per minute calculates the base for the total number of shot balls (about 60 shots per minute) and determines an illegal modification, failure, or malfunction. You may do so. Alternatively, only the number of out balls may be displayed. In this case, for example, if the number of out balls per minute (predetermined time) greatly exceeds 60 balls, or if the number of out balls per minute is extremely small, unauthorized modification, failure, or malfunction occurs. It is possible to judge that it is.

Further, in each of the above forms and its modified examples, it is decided to acquire four random numbers such as a jackpot random number as random numbers (ball entry information) acquired based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. However, one random number may be acquired and the jackpot or not, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of reach, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined based on the random number. That is, the number of random numbers to be acquired based on the starting prize and what is to be determined for each random number can be arbitrarily set.

Further, in each of the above forms and its modified example, it is configured as a so-called V-probability machine (a game machine that controls to a high-probability state based on the passage of a specific area 39), but it is changed to a high-probability state based on the type of the winning jackpot symbol. It may be configured as a game machine in which the transition of is determined. Further, in each of the above modes, it is configured as a so-called ST machine (game machine that cuts the number of probabilistic changes), but once it is controlled to the high probability state, the control to the high probability state continues until the start of the next jackpot game (game machine). It may be configured as a so-called probabilistic loop type gaming machine).

Further, in each of the above-described forms and the modified examples thereof, the variation of the special figure 2 is configured to be executed in preference to the variation of the special figure 1. On the other hand, the variation of the special figure 2 and the variation of the special figure 1 may be configured to be executed according to the winning order to the starting port. In this case, a storage area that can be stored by adding the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold is provided in the gaming RAM 84, and the winning ball information is stored in the storage area according to the winning order, and the storage order is old. It may be configured to digest from. Further, the variation of the special figure 1 may be executed even during the change of the special figure 2, and the variation of the special figure 2 may be executed even during the change of the special figure 1. That is, it may be configured as a game machine that performs so-called simultaneous fluctuations. Further, it may be configured as a so-called type 1 type 2 type mixer or a honey-type game machine. That is, the present invention can be suitably adopted for a game machine having various game characteristics regardless of the game nature of the game machine.

Of course, it is possible to combine the features of each of the above forms and the features of the modified examples, or to remove some of them.

12. Inventions Shown in the above-described Embodiments The inventions of the following means are shown in the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding configuration names and expressions in each of the above forms and the modified examples thereof, and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the components of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

The invention according to means 1
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that controls a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined control condition.
A total prize ball number measuring means (steps S201 to S204, steps S161 to S164, steps S168 to S171, and a game control microcomputer 81 that executes steps S174 to S177) capable of measuring the total number of prize balls acquired by the player.
A game control microcomputer that executes specific game ball number measuring means (step S206, S209, S207, step S166, step S173, step S179) capable of measuring a specific number of game balls (number of prizes for operating a prize, total number of launched balls). 81) and
A special storage means (special memory 89) capable of at least storing the total number of prize balls measured by the total number of prize balls measuring means and the specific number of game balls measured by the specific game ball number measuring means.
A specific ratio value that is a ratio between the total number of prize balls measured by the total number of prize balls measuring means and the specific number of game balls measured by the specific game ball number measuring means (output rate (role ratio, continuous character) Display means (output rate display 300, base display 300) that can display ratio) and base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base),
Power-on means (power supply board 150) capable of turning on power, and
A main control board (80) having a game CPU (CPU 82) for controlling the progress of a game and a game RAM (84) for storing processing information of the game CPU.
A RAM clear operation means (RAM clear switch 152) capable of erasing the stored contents of the game RAM when an operation is performed with the power turned on by the power on means is provided.
The special storage means can retain the stored contents of the total number of prize balls and the specific number of game balls even if the RAM clear operation means is operated when the power is turned on by the power-on means. It is a game machine characterized by.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, it is possible to confirm the specific ratio value by displaying the specific ratio value on the display means. Further, when the RAM clear operation means is operated when the power is turned on, the stored contents are erased in the game RAM, but the special storage means has the total number of prize balls and the specific number of game balls measured so far. It is possible to retain the stored contents. That is, it is possible to avoid erasing the values of the total number of prize balls and the specific number of game balls measured so far each time the stored contents of the game RAM are erased. As a result, it is possible to display a specific ratio value as a converged value, and it is possible to correctly determine the specific ratio value.

The invention according to means 2
In the gaming machine according to means 1.
A special power failure calculation means (game control microcomputer 81 that executes step S2904) that calculates an error detection code (checksum) based on the stored contents of the special storage means when the power supply voltage drops.
The special power-on calculation means (game control microcomputer 81 that executes step S021) that calculates an error detection code (checksum) based on the stored contents of the special storage means when the power is turned on by the power-on means.
A special collation means (game control microcomputer 81 that executes step S022) for collating the error detection code calculated by the special input calculation means with the error detection code calculated by the special power interruption calculation means. With
The special storage means is configured to be able to retain or erase the stored contents of the total number of prize balls and the specific number of game balls based on the collation result by the special collation means (see step S023 in FIG. 43). It is a game machine characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the error detection code based on the stored contents of the special storage means calculated when the power is turned on is collated with the error detection code calculated based on the stored contents of the special storage means calculated at the time of power failure. As a result, if the error detection codes match, the stored contents of the total number of prize balls and the specific number of game balls are retained. On the other hand, if the error detection codes do not match, the stored contents of the total number of prize balls and the number of specific game balls are deleted. In this way, by checking whether or not the stored contents of the total number of prize balls and the specific number of game balls are correct, it is possible to avoid displaying the specific ratio value with incorrect data.

The invention according to means 3
In the gaming machine according to means 1.
With a game power failure calculation means (game control microcomputer 81 that executes step S2902) that calculates an error detection code (checksum) based on the stored contents of the game RAM when the power supply voltage drops. ,
When the RAM clearing operation means is not operated when the power is turned on by the power-on means, the game-on turn-on calculation means (step) for calculating an error detection code (checksum) based on the stored contents of the game RAM. A game control microcomputer 81) that executes S014, and
The game control microcomputer 81 that collates the error detection code calculated by the game input calculation means with the error detection code calculated by the game power failure calculation means (game control microcomputer 81 that executes step S015). ) And,
The special storage means is configured to be able to retain or erase the stored contents of the total number of prize balls and the specific number of game balls based on the collation result of the game collation means (see step S023 in FIG. 143). It is a game machine characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine having this configuration, the error detection code based on the stored contents of the game RAM calculated when the power is turned on is collated with the error detection code calculated based on the stored contents of the game RAM calculated at the time of power failure. As a result, if the error detection codes match, it is estimated that the stored contents of the special storage means are correct, and the stored contents of the total number of prize balls and the specific number of game balls are retained. On the other hand, if the error detection codes do not match, it is estimated that the stored contents of the special storage means are incorrect, and the stored contents of the total number of prize balls and the specific number of game balls are erased. In this way, by estimating whether or not the stored content of the special storage means is correct according to whether or not the stored content of the game RAM is correct, whether or not the stored content of the total number of prize balls and the specific number of game balls is correct. It is possible to easily check whether or not.

The invention according to means 4
In the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The specific number of game balls is the number of fired balls, which is the number of game balls fired by the player.
The display means can display a base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base) which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls acquired by the player to the number of fired balls as the specific ratio value. It is a game machine characterized by.

According to the game machine having this configuration, by checking the base displayed on the display means, even an employee of the game hall can easily judge whether or not the game machine has a failure or malfunction. It is possible to do.

The invention according to means 5
In the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The specific number of game balls is the number of prizes for operating the character (number of prizes for the character, the number of consecutive prizes for the character) acquired based on the operation of the character.
The display means can display, as the specific ratio value, the output rate (role ratio, continuous prize ratio), which is the ratio of the number of prize-playing prize balls to the total number of prize balls acquired by the player. It is a game machine characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, by checking the output rate displayed on the display means, it is easy to check whether it is significantly different from the standard value (60% or 70%) cleared when it is inspected in advance. It is possible to judge.

In addition, "the establishment of the predetermined control condition" in this specification means that a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol, and the jackpot symbol indicating the winning is stopped and displayed. Is.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 80 ... Main control board 80a ... Mounting surface 81 ... Game control microcomputer 300 ... Output rate indicator, base display 300a, 300b ... Cylindrical part 400A to 400E ... Main board case 401A to 401E ... Rear side case 401a ... Notch 401b, 401c ... Shaft member IC9 ... Integrated circuit

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined control condition , and can be controlled to a normal gaming state or a privileged gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state .
A means for measuring the total number of prize balls acquired by the player, and a means for measuring the total number of prize balls won by the player.
A means for measuring the number of launched balls, which can measure the number of launched balls launched by a player and has flowed down the game area.
The number of normal total prize balls measured by the total prize ball number measuring means in the normal game state and the number of normal fire balls measured by the launch ball number measuring means in the normal game state, regardless of the game state. A storage means that can store at least the total number of fired balls measured by the launch ball number measuring means ,
A display means capable of displaying a normal base , which is a ratio of the total number of normal prize balls to the number of normal launch balls , in a predetermined display area,
Power-on means that can turn on power and
A main control board that has a game CPU that controls the progress of the game and can store the processing information of the game CPU.
A RAM clearing operation means capable of erasing the stored processing information of the gaming CPU when an operation is performed with the power being turned on by the power-on means is provided.
The storage means retains the stored contents of the normal total prize ball number, the normal launch ball number, and the total launch ball number even when the RAM clear operation means is operated with the power being turned on by the power-on means. It is possible and
The display means
The value obtained by adding the total number of launching balls measured by the launching ball number measuring means after the power is turned on to the total number of launching balls held in the storage means when the power is turned on. , While displaying a non-numerical mode different from the normal base in the display area when the normal base is less than a predetermined specific number for determining that the value has converged to some extent ,
The value obtained by adding the total number of launching balls measured by the launching ball number measuring means after the power is turned on to the total number of launching balls held in the storage means when the power is turned on. When the number is equal to or greater than the specific number, the total number of prize balls is increased after the power is turned on with respect to the normal total number of prize balls held in the storage means when the power is turned on in the display area. The launch ball after the power is turned on with respect to the value obtained by adding the total number of normal prize balls measured by the measuring means and the number of normal launch balls held in the storage means when the power is turned on. A gaming machine characterized in that a normal base , which is a ratio of a value obtained by adding the number of normal launch balls measured by a number measuring means, can be displayed.

Images